Nikon D3X
D3x to the manual cafa3394-c066-46a3-a5f9-81d265f2b762
User Manual: Nikon-D3X
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 476
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
DIGITAL CAMERA User's Manual En Where to Find It Find what you’re looking for from: i The Q&A Index ➜ pp. iv–ix Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it from the “question and answer” index. i The Table of Contents ➜ pp. x–xvii ➜ pp. 23–24 Find items by function or menu name. i The Quick Start Guide A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right away. i The Index ➜ pp. 442–448 ➜ pp. 414–420 Search by key word. i Error Messages If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor, find the solution here. i Troubleshooting ➜ pp. 407–413 Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here. A For Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety” (pg. xviii). Digitutor Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following website: http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera. Memory cards are sold separately. ❏ D3X digital camera (pg. 3) ❏ Body cap (pp. 4, 391) ❏ BS-2 accessory shoe cover (pg. 3) ❏ EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal cover (pp. 32, 34) ❏ MH-22 quick charger with power cable and two contact protectors (pp. 32, 437) ❏ UC-E4 USB cable (pp. 256, 264) ❏ USB cable clip (pg. 259) ❏ EG-D2 audio/video cable (pg. 274) ❏ AN-D3X strap (pg. 5) ❏ Warranty ❏ User’s Manual (this guide) ❏ Quick Guide ❏ Software Installation Guide ❏ Software Suite CD-ROM i Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and conventions are used: D This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera. A This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the camera. Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in brackets ([ ]). A Trademark Information Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. Microdrive is a trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the United States and other countries. HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. PictBridge is a trademark. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. ii X Introduction s Tutorial d Image Recording Options N Focus k Release Mode S ISO Sensitivity Z Exposure r White Balance J Image Enhancement l Flash Photography t Other Shooting Options I More About Playback e Voice Memos Q Connections U Menu Guide n Technical Notes iii Q&A Index Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index. ❚❚ New Features Question How do I take pictures in 35mm format? How do I take high-quality NEF (RAW) photos? How do I record photographs using two memory cards? Can I use the monitor as a viewfinder? Can I control how photos are processed? How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights? How do I focus on erratically moving subjects? Can I adjust focus separately for different lenses? Key phrase Image area See page 60 14-bit NEF (RAW) 69 Slot 2 72 Live view Picture Controls 90 162 Active D-Lighting 181 3D-tracking 308 AF fine tune 361 ❚❚ Camera Setup Question How do I focus the viewfinder? How do I keep the monitor from turning off? How do I keep the shutter speed and aperture displays from turning off? iv Key phrase Viewfinder focus See page 47 Monitor off delay 319 Auto meter off 50, 318 Question How do I set the clock? How do I set the clock for daylight savings time? How do I change time zones when I travel? How do I adjust monitor brightness for menus or playback? How do I restore default settings? How do I restore shooting menu defaults? How do I restore Custom Setting defaults? How do I change the self-timer delay? Can I reverse the electronic analog exposure display? Can I display the menus in a different language? Can I save menu settings for use on a different D3X camera? Key phrase World time See page 40, 349 LCD brightness 347 Two-button reset 204 Reset shooting menu 293 Reset custom settings 304 Self-timer delay 319 Reverse indicators 345 Language 349 Save/load settings 358 ❚❚ Menus and Displays Question How do I get more information on a menu? How do I use the menus? What do these indicators mean? What information is in the shooting information display? What does this warning mean? Key phrase See page Help 31 Using the menus Viewfinder, control panels, shooting information display Error messages and displays 26 How much charge does the battery have Battery level left? How do I get more information about the Battery info battery? 8, 10, 12, 14 414 48 355 v Question Key phrase How do I keep the file number from being reset when I insert a new memory File number sequence card? How do I reset file numbering to 1? How do I clean the camera or lens? Cleaning the camera See page 322 395 ❚❚ Taking Photographs Question How many more shots can I take with this card? How do I take bigger photographs? How can I get more photos on the memory card? Can I control how the camera focuses? How do I take a lot of photographs quickly? Can I change the frame advance rate? Can I shoot a self-portrait? Can I take pictures under low light without the flash? Can the ISO sensitivity I choose be adjusted to ensure optimal exposure? How do I freeze or blur moving objects? Key phrase Number of exposures remaining See page Image quality and size 66, 70 Autofocus 73 Release mode 86 Shooting speed Self-timer mode ISO sensitivity ISO sensitivity auto control Exposure mode f (shutter-priority auto) How do I blur background details or keep Exposure mode g both foreground and background in (aperture-priority auto) focus? vi 49 88, 321 100 104 106 116 118 Question Can I set both shutter speed and aperture manually? Can I make photos brighter or darker? How do I make a time exposure? Can I vary exposure or flash level automatically over a series of photos? Can I create multiple copies of a photo using different white balance settings? How do I adjust white balance? How do I change settings for the optional flash unit? How can I record multiple shots as a single photograph? Can I record voice memo when taking a photograph? Can I pick the standard exposure level? How can I reduce blur? Key phrase See page Exposure mode h 120 (manual) Exposure compensation 128 Long time-exposures 122 Exposure and flash 131, 328 bracketing White balance 135, 328 bracketing White balance 140 Flash mode 194 Multiple exposure 206 Voice memo 248 Fine tune optimal exposure Exposure delay mode 316 325 ❚❚ Viewing Photographs Question Can I view my photographs on the camera? Can I view more information about photos? Why do parts of my photos blink? Key phrase See page Camera playback 226 Photo info 229 Photo info, highlights 231, 282 vii Question How do I get rid of an unwanted photo? Can I delete several photos at once? Can I zoom in on pictures to make sure they’re in focus? Can I protect photos from accidental deletion? Can I hide selected photos? How do I tell if parts of my photos may be overexposed? Key phrase Deleting individual photos Delete See page 245 281 Playback zoom 243 Protect 244 Hide image Display mode: highlights Display mode: focus How do I tell where the camera focused? point Can I view photos as they are taken? Image review Can I record a voice memo on photos? Voice memo Is there an automatic playback (“slide Slide show show”) option? 281 282 282 287 251 288 ❚❚ Retouching Photographs Question How do I bring out details in shadows? Can I get rid of red eye? Can I crop photographs on the camera? Can I create a monochrome copy of a photograph? Can I create a copy with different colors? Can I use camera to create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs? Can I overlay two photos to make a single image? viii Key phrase D-Lighting Red-eye correction Trim See page 366 367 368 Monochrome 369 Filter effects 370 Color balance 370 Image overlay 371 ❚❚ Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices Question Key phrase Can I view my photos on TV? Television playback Can I view my photos in High Definition? HDMI Connecting to a How do I copy photos to my computer? computer How do I print photographs? Printing photographs Can I print photos without a computer? Printing via USB Can I print the date on my photographs? Time stamp How do I order professional prints? Print set (DPOF) See page 274 276 256 262 263 266, 270 272 ❚❚ Optional Accessories Question What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use? What lenses can I use? What AC adapters, remote cords, and viewfinder accessories are available for my camera? Key phrase See page Optional flash units 187 Compatible lenses 382 Other accessories 387 What memory cards can I use? Approved memory cards 394 What software is available for my camera? Other accessories 391 ix Table of Contents Q&A Index ................................................................................................iv For Your Safety .................................................................................. xviii Notices.....................................................................................................xxi Introduction 1 Overview....................................................................................................2 Getting to Know the Camera..............................................................3 Camera Body ....................................................................................... 3 The Top Control Panel ..................................................................... 8 The Rear Control Panel ..................................................................10 The Viewfinder Display..................................................................12 The Shooting Information Display ............................................14 The Command Dials .......................................................................16 Quick Start Guide................................................................................. 23 Tutorial 25 Camera Menus...................................................................................... 26 Using Camera Menus .....................................................................28 Help ......................................................................................................31 First Steps ............................................................................................... 32 Charge the Battery ..........................................................................32 Insert the Battery .............................................................................34 Attach a Lens.....................................................................................37 Basic Setup.........................................................................................39 Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................42 Formatting Memory Cards...........................................................45 Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...............................................................47 Basic Photography and Playback................................................... 48 Turn the Camera On .......................................................................48 Adjust Camera Settings.................................................................51 Ready the Camera ...........................................................................54 x Focus and Shoot.............................................................................. 55 Viewing Photographs.................................................................... 57 Deleting Unwanted Photographs............................................. 58 Image Recording Options 59 Image Area............................................................................................. 60 Image Quality........................................................................................ 66 Image Size .............................................................................................. 70 Slot 2 ........................................................................................................ 72 Focus 73 Focus Mode ........................................................................................... 74 AF-Area Mode....................................................................................... 76 Focus Point Selection......................................................................... 78 Focus Lock.............................................................................................. 80 Manual Focus........................................................................................ 83 Release Mode 85 Choosing a Release Mode ................................................................ 86 Continuous Mode................................................................................ 88 Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View) ............................. 90 Self-Timer Mode.................................................................................100 Mirror up Mode ..................................................................................102 ISO Sensitivity 103 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually..............................................104 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ..........................................................106 xi Exposure 109 Metering ...............................................................................................110 Exposure Mode...................................................................................112 e: Programmed Auto .................................................................. 114 f: Shutter-Priority Auto .............................................................. 116 g: Aperture-Priority Auto ........................................................... 118 h: Manual......................................................................................... 120 Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock...............................................123 Autoexposure (AE) Lock..................................................................125 Exposure Compensation.................................................................128 Bracketing ............................................................................................130 White Balance 139 White Balance Options ....................................................................140 Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................143 Choosing a Color Temperature ....................................................147 Preset Manual .....................................................................................148 Image Enhancement 161 Picture Controls..................................................................................162 Creating Custom Picture Controls.......................................... 170 Active D-Lighting...............................................................................181 Color Space..........................................................................................183 Flash Photography 185 The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ...............................186 Compatible Flash Units ...................................................................187 CLS-Compatible Flash Units ..................................................... 187 Other Flash Units .......................................................................... 191 i-TTL Flash Control.............................................................................193 Flash Modes.........................................................................................194 xii FV Lock ..................................................................................................198 Flash Contacts.....................................................................................201 Other Shooting Options 203 Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .......................204 Multiple Exposure .............................................................................206 Interval Timer Photography ..........................................................211 Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................218 Using a GPS Unit ................................................................................221 More About Playback 225 Full-Frame Playback .........................................................................226 Photo Information.............................................................................229 Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback .....................241 Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion.....................................244 Deleting Individual Photographs ................................................245 Voice Memos 247 Recording Voice Memos .................................................................248 Playing Voice Memos.......................................................................253 Connections 255 Connecting to a Computer ............................................................256 Direct USB Connection ...............................................................258 Wireless and Ethernet Networks .............................................261 Printing Photographs.......................................................................262 Direct USB Connection ...............................................................263 Viewing Photographs on TV..........................................................274 Standard Definition Devices .....................................................274 High-Definition Devices .............................................................276 xiii Menu Guide 277 D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...............................278 Delete........................................................................................... 281 Playback Folder......................................................................... 281 Hide Image ................................................................................. 281 Display Mode............................................................................. 282 Copy Image(s) ........................................................................... 283 Image Review ............................................................................ 287 After Delete ................................................................................ 287 Rotate Tall................................................................................... 287 Slide Show .................................................................................. 288 Print Set (DPOF) ........................................................................ 289 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options...............................290 Shooting Menu Bank .............................................................. 291 Reset Shooting Menu ............................................................. 293 Active Folder.............................................................................. 293 File Naming ................................................................................ 296 Slot 2............................................................................................. 296 Image Quality ............................................................................ 296 Image Size................................................................................... 297 Image Area ................................................................................. 297 JPEG Compression................................................................... 297 NEF (RAW) Recording ............................................................. 297 White Balance............................................................................ 297 Set Picture Control................................................................... 298 Manage Picture Control......................................................... 298 Color Space ................................................................................ 298 Active D-Lighting ..................................................................... 298 Vignette Control....................................................................... 299 Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction) .......... 300 High ISO NR................................................................................ 300 ISO Sensitivity Settings .......................................................... 301 Live View ..................................................................................... 301 Multiple Exposure.................................................................... 301 Interval Timer Shooting......................................................... 301 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ..............302 B: Custom Setting Bank........................................................ 304 xiv A: Reset Custom Settings .....................................................304 a: Autofocus ....................................................................................305 a1: AF-C Priority Selection .....................................................305 a2: AF-S Priority Selection .....................................................306 a3: Dynamic AF Area ...............................................................307 a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On........................................309 a5: AF Activation.......................................................................309 a6: Focus Point Illumination .................................................310 a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around..............................................311 a8: AF Point Selection .............................................................311 a9: AF-ON Button......................................................................312 a10: Vertical AF-ON Button ...................................................313 b: Metering/Exposure..................................................................314 b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value ..............................................314 b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl. ..........................................314 b3: EV Steps for Exposure Comp.........................................314 b4: Easy Exposure Compensation ......................................315 b5: Center-Weighted Area ....................................................316 b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure.........................................316 c: Timers/AE Lock ..........................................................................318 c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .........................................318 c2: Auto Meter-off Delay........................................................318 c3: Self-Timer Delay .................................................................319 c4: Monitor off Delay...............................................................319 d: Shooting/Display......................................................................320 d1: Beep .......................................................................................320 d2: Shooting Speed .................................................................321 d3: Max. Continuous Release ...............................................321 d4: File Number Sequence....................................................322 d5: Control Panel/Viewfinder...............................................323 d6: Shooting Info Display ......................................................324 d7: LCD Illumination................................................................325 d8: Exposure Delay Mode......................................................325 e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................326 e1: Flash Sync Speed ...............................................................326 e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................327 e3: Modeling Flash...................................................................327 e4: Auto Bracketing Set..........................................................328 e5: Auto Bracketing (Mode M) .............................................329 xv e6: Bracketing Order ............................................................... 330 f: Controls ........................................................................................ 331 f1: Multi Selector Center Button ......................................... 331 f2: Multi Selector....................................................................... 332 f3: Photo Info/Playback.......................................................... 332 f4: Assign FUNC. Button......................................................... 333 f5: Assign Preview Button ..................................................... 339 f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button ................................................. 340 f7: Customize Command Dials ............................................ 341 f8: Release Button to Use Dial.............................................. 343 f9: No Memory Card? .............................................................. 344 f10: Reverse Indicators ........................................................... 345 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...............................................346 Format Memory Card ............................................................. 347 LCD Brightness.......................................................................... 347 Lock Mirror up for Cleaning ................................................. 347 Video Mode................................................................................ 348 HDMI............................................................................................. 348 World Time ................................................................................. 349 Language .................................................................................... 349 Image Comment ...................................................................... 350 Auto Image Rotation .............................................................. 351 Voice Memo ............................................................................... 351 Voice Memo Overwrite .......................................................... 352 Voice Memo Button ................................................................ 352 Audio Output ............................................................................ 352 USB ................................................................................................ 352 Dust off Ref Photo.................................................................... 353 Battery Info................................................................................. 355 Wireless Transmitter ............................................................... 356 Image Authentication ............................................................ 356 Copyright Information ........................................................... 357 Save/Load Settings.................................................................. 358 GPS ................................................................................................ 360 Virtual Horizon .......................................................................... 360 Non-CPU Lens Data................................................................. 360 AF Fine Tune .............................................................................. 361 Firmware Version ..................................................................... 362 xvi N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .............363 D-Lighting ...................................................................................366 Red-Eye Correction ..................................................................367 Trim................................................................................................368 Monochrome .............................................................................369 Filter Effects ................................................................................370 Color Balance .............................................................................370 Image Overlay............................................................................371 Side-by-Side Comparison......................................................374 O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu......................................376 Adding Options to My Menu ....................................................376 Deleting Options from My Menu ............................................378 Reordering Options in My Menu.............................................379 Displaying Recent Settings........................................................380 Technical Notes 381 Compatible Lenses ...........................................................................382 Other Accessories..............................................................................387 Caring for the Camera......................................................................395 Storage..............................................................................................395 Cleaning ...........................................................................................395 Replacing the Focusing Screen................................................396 Replacing the Clock Battery ......................................................398 The Low-Pass Filter.......................................................................400 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..........................403 Troubleshooting ................................................................................407 Error Messages ...................................................................................414 Appendix ..............................................................................................421 Specifications......................................................................................431 Index.......................................................................................................442 xvii For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them. The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol: icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all A This warnings before using this Nikon product. ❚❚ WARNINGS A Keep the sun out of the frame Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire. A Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment. A Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder, care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally. xviii A Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter (available separately), unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately, taking care to avoid burns. Continued operation could result in injury. After removing the battery, take the equipment to a Nikonauthorized service center for inspection. A Do not disassemble Touching the product’s internal parts could result in injury. In the event of malfunction, the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician. Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident, remove the battery and/or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon-authorized service center for inspection. A Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas, as this could result in explosion or fire. A Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury. A Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation. A Observe proper precautions when • • • • • • handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product: Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment. Use only CR1616 lithium batteries to replace the clock battery. Using another type of battery could cause an explosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed. Do not short or disassemble the battery. Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery. If you are using an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged. Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards. Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat. • Do not immerse in or expose to water. • Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery. Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins. • Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged. To avoid damage to the product, be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains. • When the battery is not in use, attach the terminal cover and store in a cool, dry place. • The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period. Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool. • Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery, such as discoloration or deformation. xix A Observe proper precautions when • • • • • • xx handling the quick charger Keep dry. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock. Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth. Continued use could result in fire. Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock. Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug or bend the power cable. Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame. Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed, take the power cable to a Nikonauthorized service representative for inspection. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock. Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock. Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire. A Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks, use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations. A CD-ROMs CD-ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment. A Observe caution when using a flash • Using optional flash units in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns. • Using optional flash units close to the subject’s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment. Particular care should be observed when photographing infants, when the flash should be no less than one meter (39 in.) from the subject. A Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth. Notices • No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any product may be reproduced, transmitted, damages resulting from the use of this transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, product. or translated into any language in any • While every effort has been made to form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior ensure that the information in these written permission. manuals is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring • Nikon reserves the right to change the any errors or omissions to the attention specifications of the hardware and of the Nikon representative in your area software described in these manuals at (address provided separately). any time and without prior notice. Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. ATTENTION Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Notice for Customers in Europe CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately. This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately. The following apply only to users in European countries: • This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste. • For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management. The following apply only to users in European countries: • All batteries, whether marked with this symbol or not, are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste. • For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management. xxi Notices for Customers in the U.S.A. The Battery Charger IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. D3X These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful CAUTIONS interference in a residential installation. Modifications This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not The FCC requires the user be notified that installed and used in accordance with the any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by instructions, may cause harmful Nikon Corporation may void the user’s interference to radio communications. authority to operate the equipment. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular Interface Cables installation. If this equipment does cause Use the interface cables sold or provided harmful interference to radio or television by Nikon for your equipment. Using other reception, which can be determined by interface cables may exceed the limits of turning the equipment off and on, the user Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules. is encouraged to try to correct the Notice for Customers in the State of California interference by one or more of the WARNING: Handling the cord on this product following measures: may expose you to lead, a chemical known • Reorient or relocate the receiving to the State of California to cause birth antenna. defects or other reproductive harm. Wash • Increase the separation between the hands after handling. equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, a circuit different from that to which the Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A. receiver is connected. Tel.: 631-547-4200 • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. xxii Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility. Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices. Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law. • Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample.” The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited. • Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also, do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies and private groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons. Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the • Comply with copyright notices copying or reproduction or unused The copying or reproduction of postage stamps or post cards issued by copyrighted creative works such as the government is prohibited. books, music, paintings, woodcuts, The copying or reproduction of stamps prints, maps, drawings, movies, and issued by the government and of photographs is governed by national certified documents stipulated by law and international copyright laws. Do is prohibited. not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws. xxiii Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry. The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking. For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer. A Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction. A Life-Long Learning As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education, continually-updated information is available online at the following sites: • For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/ • For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/ • For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/ Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/ xxiv XIntroduction X This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera, including the names of camera parts. Overview.............................................................................. pg. 2 Getting to Know the Camera ........................................... pg. 3 Camera Body ....................................................................................... pg. 3 The Top Control Panel...................................................................... pg. 8 The Rear Control Panel .................................................................. pg. 10 The Viewfinder Display.................................................................. pg. 12 The Shooting Information Display ............................................ pg. 14 The Command Dials ....................................................................... pg. 16 Quick Start Guide ............................................................. pg. 23 1 Overview X Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera. Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly to get the most from the camera, and keep them where they will be read by all those who use the product. D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY. D Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced. 2 Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual. X Camera Body 1 D (bracketing) button ....................... 131, 135, 328 2 Release mode dial lock release....................................87 3 Release mode dial.......................87 4 Eyelet for camera strap ............... 5 5 M (flash mode) button ............ 196 6 F (command lock) button .................................123, 124 7 Focal plane mark (E)................84 8 Metering selector..................... 111 9 Metering selector lock button................................. 111 10 Power switch.................................48 11 Shutter-release button ...... 55, 56 12 E (exposure compensation) button...........................................128 13 Eyelet for camera strap................5 14 I (exposure mode) button...........................................113 Q (format) button..................... 45 15 Top control panel ..........................8 16 Diopter adjustment knob........ 47 17 Accessory shoe ..................22, 201 (for optional flash unit) 18 Accessory shoe cover ........................................ 22, 201, 405 3 Camera Body (Continued) X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 Mirror............................90, 102, 400 Self-timer lamp ......................... 101 Flash sync terminal cover...... 201 Ten-pin remote terminal cover ....................................221, 392 Flash sync terminal.................. 201 Ten-pin remote terminal ..............................221, 392 USB connector cover .....258, 264 Lens release button....................38 Connector cover..............274, 276 10 USB connector................. 258, 264 11 DC-IN connector for optional AC adapter EH-6......387 12 Audio/video (A/V) connector ....................................274 13 HDMI connector........................276 14 Focus-mode selector.......... 74, 83 15 Battery-cover latch..................... 34 16 Battery-chamber cover............. 34 17 Meter coupling lever ...............433 18 Body cap ......................................391 X 1 Depth-of-field preview 6 button .................................113, 339 2 Sub-command dial.....................16 7 3 Fn button .....................64, 199, 333 8 4 Sub-command dial for 9 vertical shooting .........................16 10 5 Shutter-release button for vertical shooting .........................54 Vertical shooting shutterrelease button lock .................... 54 CPU contacts Mounting index .......................... 37 Lens mount................................... 84 Tripod socket ❚❚ Attaching the Camera Strap Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as shown below. 5 Camera Body (Continued) X 1 Viewfinder eyepiece...................47 2 Eyepiece shutter lever...............47 3 O (delete) button............... 58, 245 Q (format) button.....................45 4 K (playback) button ....... 57, 226 5 Monitor.......................... 57, 90, 226 6 G (menu) button.......... 26, 277 7 N (thumbnail/playback zoom) button ...................242, 243 8 L (protect) button ............... 244 ? (help) button..............................31 R (info) button............................14 D 9 10 11 12 J (OK) button.............................. 28 Speaker.........................................254 Rear control panel .............10, 323 ISO (ISO sensitivity) button.....104 Two-button reset button .......204 13 QUAL (image quality/size) button...................................... 67, 71 14 WB (white balance) button........................141, 146, 147 Two-button reset button .......204 15 Microphone ................................248 The Speaker and Microphone Do not bring magnetic devices, such as microdrive cards, close to the built-in speaker or microphone. 6 X 1 Viewfinder .....................................47 2 A (AE/AF lock) button .......................................... 80, 81, 340 3 B (AF-ON) button ..........75, 94 4 Main command dial ...................16 5 Multi selector................................28 6 Focus selector lock .....................78 7 Memory card access lamp....43, 56 8 Memory card slot cover ..... 42, 44 9 Card slot cover release button (under cover)................................ 42 10 B (AF-ON) button for vertical shooting.......................313 11 H (microphone) button ..........249 12 AF-area mode selector ............. 76 13 Main command dial for vertical shooting......................... 16 7 The Top Control Panel X 1 2 3 11 12 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 1 Shutter speed ...................116, 120 9 Memory card indicator Exposure compensation (slot 2) ...................................... 42, 45 value ............................................. 128 10 Number of exposures Number of shots in remaining ...................................... 49 exposure and flash bracketing Number of shots remaining sequence..................................... 131 before memory buffer fills ...... 88 Number of shots in Capture mode indicator.........256 WB bracketing sequence ...... 135 11 Aperture stop indicator .. 119, 385 Number of intervals for 12 Aperture (f-number)...... 118, 120 interval timer photography .... 214 Aperture (number of Focal length stops)................................... 119, 385 (non-CPU lenses)...................... 220 Exposure and flash bracketing ISO sensitivity ............................ 104 increment ....................................132 2 Shutter-speed lock icon......... 123 WB bracketing increment......136 3 Flexible program indicator ... 115 Number of shots per interval .........................................214 4 Exposure mode......................... 112 Maximum aperture 5 Flash mode................................. 194 (non-CPU lenses) ......................220 6 Shooting menu bank.............. 291 PC mode indicator....................259 7 Custom settings bank............. 304 8 Memory card indicator (slot 1).......................................42, 45 8 21 22 16 17 23 24 25 26 18 19 SHOOT CUSTOM 20 13 Battery indicator..........................48 14 Frame count..................................49 Preset white balance recording indicator.................. 151 Manual lens number............... 220 15 “K” (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures) .....................................49 16 FV lock indicator....................... 199 17 Flash sync indicator................. 326 18 Clock battery indicator ... 41, 398 19 GPS connection indicator ..... 223 20 Focus mode indicator................74 21 Interval timer indicator .......... 214 22 Multiple exposure indicator....................................... 208 23 Aperture lock icon ................... 124 X 27 28 29 24 Image comment indicator ....350 25 “Beep” indicator ........................320 26 Exposure compensation indicator.......................................128 27 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator.......................................131 28 White-balance bracketing indicator.......................................135 29 Electronic analog exposure display ..........................................122 Exposure compensation ........128 Exposure and flash bracketing progress indicator ....................131 WB bracketing progress indicator.......................................135 PC connection indicator ........259 Tilt indicator................................335 9 The Rear Control Panel 1 2 3 X 8 9 4 10 11 5 12 6 7 A LCD Illuminators Rotating the power switch toward D activates the exposure meters and the control panel backlights (LCD illuminators), allowing the displays to be read in the dark. After the power switch is released, the illuminators will remain lit for six seconds (at default settings) while the exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward D again. 10 Power switch 1 2 3 4 Image quality (JPEG images) ..67 6 “K” (appears when memory remains for over 1000 “Remaining” indicator ...............49 exposures)..................................... 49 Image size......................................71 Color temperature ISO sensitivity indicator ......... 104 indicator.......................................147 Auto ISO sensitivity 7 Memory card slot indicators... 72 indicator ...................................... 106 Image quality ............................... 67 5 ISO sensitivity ............................ 104 8 White-balance bracketing ISO sensitivity (high/low gain) indicator.......................................135 ........................................................ 105 9 Voice memo recording Number of exposures indicator (shooting mode) ....249 remaining ......................................49 Length of voice memo........... 251 10 Voice memo status White balance fine-tuning.... 146 indicator............................. 251, 252 White balance preset 11 Voice memo recording number ........................................ 158 mode.............................................249 Color temperature ................... 147 12 White balance ............................140 PC mode indicator................... 259 White balance fine-tuning indicator.......................................146 X 11 The Viewfinder Display 3 2 1 X 21 22 23 4 5 6 17 7 8 18 9 10 11 19 12 13 14 15 16 20 1 12-mm reference circle for 7 Exposure mode .........................112 center-weighted metering ... 110 8 Shutter speed lock icon..........123 2 AF area brackets ...................47, 92 9 Shutter-speed .................. 116, 120 3 Focus points........................ 78, 311 10 Aperture lock icon....................124 Spot metering targets ............ 110 11 Aperture (f-number)...... 118, 120 4 Focus indicator......................55, 84 Aperture (number of stops)........... 119, 385 5 Metering...................................... 110 6 Autoexposure (AE) lock ......... 125 12 12 ISO sensitivity indicator ......... 104 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ...................................... 106 13 ISO sensitivity ............................ 104 14 Frame count..................................49 Number of exposures remaining ......................................49 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills.......88 Preset white balance recording indicator.................. 151 Exposure compensation value ............................................. 128 PC mode indicator................... 259 15 “K” (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures) .....................................49 16 17 18 19 20 21 Flash-ready indicator *.............199 FV lock indicator .......................199 Flash sync indicator .................326 Aperture stop indicator .. 119, 385 Battery indicator ......................... 48 Electronic analog exposure display ..........................................122 Exposure compensation display .........................................................128 Tilt indicator................................335 22 Exposure compensation indicator.......................................128 23 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator.......................................131 X * Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached (pg. 187). The flashready indicator lights when the flash is charged. D No Battery When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fullycharged battery is inserted. D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. 13 The Shooting Information Display X Shooting information, including shutter R speed, aperture, the number of exposures button remaining, and AF-area mode is displayed in the monitor when the R button is pressed. To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button again or press the shutter-release button halfway. At default settings, the monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 20 seconds. 1 23 4 56 8 16 9 10 15 14 11 13 12 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 38 37 36 35 A 7 34 33 32 31 See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom Setting c4 ([Monitor off delay], pg. 319). For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting information display, see Custom Setting d6 ([Shooting info display], pg. 324). 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Exposure mode......................... 112 Flexible program indicator ... 115 Shutter-speed lock icon......... 123 Shutter speed ...................116, 120 Exposure compensation value ............................................. 128 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence ........................................................ 131 Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence .............. 135 Focal length (non-CPU lenses)...................... 220 Multiple exposure indicator.... 208 Aperture lock icon ................... 124 Aperture (f-number) ......118, 120 Aperture (number of stops) ...........119, 385 Exposure and flash bracketing increment ................................... 132 WB bracketing increment ..... 136 Maximum aperture (non-CPU lenses)...................... 220 Aperture stop indicator...119, 385 Number of exposures remaining ......................................49 “K” (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures) .....................................49 Frame count..................................49 Manual lens number............... 220 Memory card indicator (slot 2).......................................42, 45 Memory card indicator (slot 1).......................................42, 45 Custom settings bank............. 304 Shooting menu bank.............. 291 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Flash sync indicator .................326 Flash mode..................................194 Clock battery indicator ....41, 398 FV lock indicator .......................199 Interval timer indicator...........214 Image comment indicator ....350 Copyright information indicator.......................................357 “Beep” indicator ........................320 Exposure compensation indicator.......................................128 Battery indicator ......................... 48 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator.......................................131 WB bracketing indicator ........135 Focus mode indicator ............... 74 Long exposure noise reduction indicator.......................................300 Color space indicator ..............183 Picture Control indicator........165 Active D-Lighting indicator...181 High ISO noise reduction indicator.......................................300 Vignette control ........................299 Release mode (single frame/ continuous) indicator................ 86 Continuous shooting speed....321 Auto-area AF indicator ............. 77 Focus points indicator .............. 78 AF-area mode indicator ........... 77 3D-tracking indicator.......77, 308 Image area indicator ................. 61 GPS connection indicator......223 Electronic analog exposure display ..........................................122 X 15 The Command Dials The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings. X Fn button Sub-command dial BKT button E button M button I button Main command dial F button ISO button 16 QUAL button WB button ❚❚ Image Quality and Size Press the Fn or QUAL button and rotate the command dials. Choose an image area (pg. 64)* X + Fn button Main command dial Shooting information display * The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached. Set image quality (pg. 67) + QUAL button Main command dial Rear control panel Choose an image size (pg. 71) + QUAL button Sub-command dial Rear control panel ❚❚ ISO Sensitivity Press the ISO button and rotate the main command dial. Set ISO sensitivity (pg. 104) + ISO button Main command dial Rear control panel 17 ❚❚ Exposure Press the I button and rotate the main command dial to choose the exposure mode. X Choose the exposure mode (pg. 113) + I button Main command dial Top control panel Use the command dials to adjust exposure. Choose a combination of aperture and shutter speed (exposure mode e; pg. 115) + SHOOT CUSTOM SHOOT CUSTOM Exposure mode e Choose a shutter speed (exposure mode f or h; pg. 116, 121) Main command dial + SHOOT CUSTOM SHOOT CUSTOM Exposure mode f or h Choose an aperture (exposure mode g or h; pg. 118, 121) Main command dial Top control panel + SHOOT CUSTOM Exposure mode g or h 18 Top control panel SHOOT CUSTOM Sub-command dial Top control panel Set exposure compensation (pg. 128) + X E button Shutter speed lock (exposure mode f or h; pg. 123) Main command dial Top control panel + SHOOT CUSTOM F button Aperture lock (exposure mode g or h; pg. 124) Main command dial Top control panel + SHOOT CUSTOM F button Sub-command dial Top control panel 19 X Activate or cancel bracketing/ select number of shots in bracketing sequence (pp. 131, 134) + D button Select bracketing exposure increment (pg. 132) Main command dial Top control panel + D button Sub-command dial Top control panel ❚❚ White Balance Press the WB button and rotate the command dials. Choose a white balance setting (pg. 141) + WB button Fine-tune white balance (pg. 146), set color temperature (pg. 147), or choose a white balance preset (pg. 158) 20 Main command dial Rear control panel + WB button Sub-command dial Rear control panel ❚❚ Flash Settings Press the M button and rotate the main command dial. Choose flash mode (pg. 196) X + M button Main command dial Top control panel A The Fn Button Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting f4 ([Assign FUNC. button], pg. 333), the Fn button and command dials can be used to select from FX, DX, and 5 : 4 image areas, toggle between FX and DX image areas, select shutter speed and aperture in steps of 1 EV, choose prespecified lens data for non-CPU lenses, select the focus point, choose a shooting menu bank, or select the number of focus points for dynamicarea AF. A The Depth-of-Field Preview and AE-L/AF-L Buttons Depending on the options selected for Custom Settings f5 ([Assign preview button], pg. 339) and f6 ([Assign AE-L/AF-L button], pg. 340), the depth-of-field preview and AE-L/AF-L buttons can be used with the command dials to perform the same functions as the Fn button. 21 The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover X The supplied BS-2 accessory shoe cover can be used to protect the accessory shoe or to prevent light reflected from the metal parts of the shoe from appearing in photographs. The BS-2 attaches to the camera accessory shoe as shown at right. To remove the accessory shoe cover, hold it down with your thumb and slide it off as shown at right while keeping a firm grip on the camera. 22 Quick Start Guide Follow these steps for a quick start with the D3X. X 1 Charge the battery (pg. 32). 2 Insert the battery (pg. 34). 3 Attach a lens (pg. 37). Mounting index 4 Insert a memory card (pg. 42). Back 5 Turn the camera on (pg. 48). For information on choosing a language and setting the time and date, see page 39. See page 47 for information on adjusting viewfinder focus. 23 6 Check camera settings (pp. 48, 51). X Battery level Exposure mode Image size White balance SHOOT CUSTOM Number of exposures remaining ISO sensitivity Frame count Top control panel Image quality Rear control panel 7 Select single-servo autofocus (pg. 53, 74). Rotate the focus-mode selector to S (single-servo autofocus). 8 Focus and shoot (pp. 55, 56). Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus, then press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph. 9 View the photograph (pg. 57). K button 10 Delete unwanted photos (pg. 58). Press O twice to delete the current photograph. 24 O button Focus indicator sTutorial s This section describes how to use the camera menus, how to ready the camera for use, and how to take your first pictures and play them back. Camera Menus .................................................................. pg. 26 Using Camera Menus ..................................................................... pg. 28 Help ...................................................................................................... pg. 31 First Steps .......................................................................... pg. 32 Charge the Battery .......................................................................... pg. 32 Insert the Battery ............................................................................. pg. 34 Attach a Lens..................................................................................... pg. 37 Basic Setup......................................................................................... pg. 39 Insert a Memory Card..................................................................... pg. 42 Formatting Memory Cards ........................................................... pg. 45 Adjust Viewfinder Focus................................................................ pg. 47 Basic Photography and Playback...................................pg. 48 Turn the Camera On ....................................................................... pg. 48 Adjust Camera Settings................................................................. pg. 51 Ready the Camera ........................................................................... pg. 54 Focus and Shoot .............................................................................. pg. 55 Viewing Photographs..................................................................... pg. 57 Deleting Unwanted Photographs ............................................. pg. 58 25 Camera Menus Most shooting, playback, and setup options can be accessed from the camera menus. To view the menus, press the G button. G button s Tabs Choose from playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, retouch, and My menus (see following page). Slider shows position in current menu. Current settings are shown by icons. Q If “Q” icon is displayed, help for current item can be viewed by pressing L (Q) button (pg. 31). 26 Menu options Options in current menu. ❚❚ Menus The following menus are available: Menu Description Adjust playback settings and manage photos (pg. D Playback 278). C Shooting Adjust shooting settings (pg. 290). A Custom Settings Personalize camera settings (pg. 302). Format memory cards and perform basic camera B Setup setup (pg. 346). Create retouched copies of existing photographs N Retouch (pg. 363). Create a menu of custom options (pg. 376). If desired, a menu of recently-used settings can be O My Menu displayed in place of [My Menu] (pg. 380). s 27 Using Camera Menus ❚❚ Menu Controls The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus. Select highlighted item Move cursor up s Select highlighted item or display submenu Cancel and return to previous menu Move cursor down J button Select highlighted item ❚❚ Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the menus. 1 Display the menus. Press the G button to display the menus. 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu. Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu. 28 G button 3 Select a menu. Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu. s 4 Position the cursor in the selected menu. Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu. 5 Highlight a menu item. Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item. 6 Display options. Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item. 7 Highlight an option. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option. 29 8 Select the highlighted item. Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit without making a selection, press the G button. s J button Note the following points: • Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available. • While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J. • To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway (pg. 56). 30 Help If a Q icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, help can be displayed by pressing the L (Q) button. A description of the currently selected option or menu will be displayed while the button is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the display. s L button 31 First Steps Charge the Battery s The D3X is powered by an EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery (supplied). The EN-EL4a is not fully charged at shipment. To maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-22 quick charger before use. About two hours and twenty-five minutes are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains. 1 Plug the charger in. Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and plug the power cable into an electrical outlet. All lamps will remain off. 2 Remove the terminal cover. Remove the terminal cover from the battery. 3 Remove the contact protector. Remove the contact protector of the quick charger’s battery chambers. 32 4 Charge the battery. Contacts Chamber lamps Charge lamps (green) s Guide Insert the battery (terminals first), aligning the end of the battery with the guide and then sliding the battery in the direction indicated until it clicks into place. The chamber lamp and charge lamps will blink while the battery charges: Charge state Less than 50% of maximum capacity 50–80% of maximum capacity More than 80% but less than 100% of maximum capacity 100% of maximum capacity Charge lamps Chamber 50% 80% 100% lamp H (blinks) H (blinks) I (off) I (off) H (blinks) K (glows) H (blinks) I (off) H (blinks) K (glows) K (glows) H (blinks) K (glows) I (off) I (off) I (off) Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops blinking and the charge lamps turn off. About two hours and twentyfive minutes are required to fully charge an exhausted battery. 5 Remove the battery when charging is complete. Remove the battery and unplug the charger. A Calibration See page 437 for more information on calibration. 33 Insert the Battery 1 Turn the camera off. Power switch Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries. s 2 Remove the battery-chamber cover. Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn it to the open (A) position (q) and remove the BL-4 battery-chamber cover (w). 3 Attach the cover to the battery. If the battery release is positioned so that the arrow (4) is visible, slide the battery release to cover the arrow. Insert the two projections on the battery into the matching slots in the cover and slide the battery release to reveal the arrow. A The BL-4 Battery-Chamber Cover The battery can be charged with the BL-4 attached. To prevent dust from accumulating inside the battery chamber when the battery is not inserted, slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow (4), remove the BL-4 from the battery, and replace it on the camera. The BL-1 battery-chamber cover for D2-series cameras can not be used. 34 4 Insert the battery. Insert the battery as shown at right. 5 s Latch the cover. To prevent the battery from becoming dislodged during operation, rotate the latch to the closed position and fold it down as shown at right. Be sure the cover is securely latched. A EN-EL4a Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries The supplied EN-EL4a shares information with compatible devices, enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels (pg. 48). The [Battery info] option in the setup menu details battery charge, battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged (pg. 355). The battery can be recalibrated as necessary to ensure that battery level continues to be reported accurately (pg. 437). 35 D The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii–xx and 403–406 of this manual. To prevent short-circuits, replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use. s Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F). Charge indoors at ambient temperatures in the vicinity of 5–35°C (41–95°F); for best results, charge the battery at temperatures above 20°C (68°F). Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5°C (41°F), the battery life indicator in the [Battery info] display may show a temporary decrease. The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to cool before recharging. Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use. A Compatible Batteries The camera can also be used with EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries. A Removing the Battery Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn it to the open (A) position. To prevent short-circuits, replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use. 36 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed. 1 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap. After confirming that the camera is off, remove the rear lens cap from the lens and remove the camera body cap. 2 s Attach the lens. Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body, position the lens in the camera’s bayonet mount. Being careful not to press the lensrelease button, rotate the lens counter-clockwise until it clicks into place. Mounting index If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M switch, select A (autofocus) or M/ A (autofocus with manual priority). 37 ❚❚ Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise. After removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body cap. s D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (pg. 384), lock aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number). See the lens manual for details. A Lens An AF Nikkor 85 mm f/1.4D lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes. Lens cap Mounting index CPU contacts (pg. 384) Aperture ring A-M mode switch (pg. 37) Focus ring (pg. 83) A Image Area The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached. Image area 38 Basic Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a language and set the time and date. 1 Turn the camera on. 2 Select [Language]. Power switch s G button Press G to display the camera menus, then select [Language] in the setup menu. For information on using menus, see “Using Camera Menus” (pg. 28). 3 Select a language. Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language and press J. 39 4 Select [World time]. Select [World time] and press 2. s 5 Set time zone. A time-zone selection dialog will be displayed. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the local time zone (the [UTC] field shows the difference between the selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time, or UTC, in hours) and press J. 6 Turn daylight saving time on or off. Daylight saving time options will be displayed. Daylight saving time is off by default; if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone, press 1 to highlight [On] and press J. 7 Set the date and time. The dialog shown at right will be displayed. Press 4 or 2 to select an item, 1 or 3 to change. Press J when the clock is set to the current date and time. 40 8 Set date format. Press 1 or 3 to choose the order in which the year, month, and day will be displayed and press J. 9 s Exit to shooting mode. Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode. A The B Icon If a flashing B icon appears in the top control panel the first time the camera is used, check that clock settings (including time zone and daylight saving time) are correct. The icon will stop flashing when the J button is pressed to exit the menu. A The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about four years. When this battery is exhausted, a B icon will be displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on. For information on replacing the clock battery, see page 398. A The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary. 41 Insert a Memory Card The camera stores photographs on CompactFlash and microdrive memory cards (available separately; pg. 394). Up to two memory cards can be inserted in the camera simultaneously. The following section describes how to insert and format a memory card. s 1 Turn the camera off. Power switch Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards. 2 Open the card slot cover. Open the door protecting the card-slot cover release button (q) and press the release button (w) to open the card slot (e). A Memory Card Slots Slot 1 is for the main card; the card in slot 2 plays a backup or secondary role. If the default setting of [Overflow] is selected for [Slot 2] (pg. 72) when two memory cards are inserted, the card in slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is full. Slot 1 Slot 2 The card currently in use is indicated in the top control panel. SHOOT CUSTOM 42 3 Insert the memory card. Insert the first memory card in slot 1. Slot 2 should be used only if a card is already inserted in slot 1. Insert the memory card with the rear label toward the monitor (q). When the memory card is fully inserted, the eject button will pop up (w) and the green access lamp will light briefly. Access lamp s Rear label D Inserting Memory Cards Insert the memory card terminals first. Inserting the card upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card. Check to be sure that the card is in the correct orientation. Direction of insertion Terminals Rear label 4 Close the card slot cover. 43 ❚❚ Removing Memory Cards 1 Turn the camera off. Confirm that the access lamp is off and turn the camera off. s Access lamp 2 Remove the memory card. Open the memory card slot cover (q) and press the eject button (w) to partially eject the card (e). The memory card can then be removed by hand. Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card. D Memory Cards • Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera. • Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted in the camera before they can be used for recording or playback. • Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card. • Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects. • Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks. • Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. • Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight. 44 Formatting Memory Cards Memory cards must be formatted before first use. Format the card as described below. D Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (pg. 256). 1 Turn the camera on. 2 Press the Q buttons. s Power switch I button O button Hold the Q (I and O) buttons down simultaneously for more than two seconds. A blinking C will appear in the shutter-speed displays in the viewfinder and top control panel. If two memory cards are inserted, the main command dial can be used to select the card to be formatted; check that the correct card is selected in the top control panel before proceeding. To exit without formatting the memory card, press any button other than the Q (I and O) buttons. SHOOT 45 3 Press the Q buttons again. Press the Q (I and O) buttons together a second time to format the memory card. Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting. s When formatting is complete, the top control panel will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings and the frame-count displays will show B. SHOOT CUSTOM A No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted, the top control panel and viewfinder will show S. If the camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL4a battery and no memory card inserted, S will be displayed in the top control panel. A See Also See page 347 for information on formatting memory cards using the [Format memory card] option in the setup menu. 46 Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision. Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting. 1 Lift the diopter adjustment knob. s Remove the lens cap, turn the camera on, and pull the diopter adjustment knob out (q). 2 Focus the viewfinder. Rotate the diopter adjustment knob (w) until the viewfinder display, focus points, and AF area brackets are in sharp focus. 3 Replace the diopter adjustment knob. Push the diopter adjustment knob back in (e). A Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses Corrective lenses (available separately; pg. 389) can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter. Before attaching a diopter-adjustment viewfinder lens, remove the DK-17 viewfinder eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to release the eyepiece lock (q) and then unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right (w). 47 Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera On s Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining as described below. 1 Turn the camera on. Power switch Turn the camera on. The control panels will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light. 2 Check the battery level. Check the battery level in the viewfinder or top control panel. SHOOT CUSTOM Icon * Control panel Viewfinder Description L — Battery fully charged. K — J — Battery partially discharged. I — Low battery. Prepare to charge battery H d or ready spare battery. H d Shutter release disabled. Charge or (blinks) (blinks) exchange battery. * No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter. 48 3 Check the number of exposures remaining. SHOOT CUSTOM The top control panel shows the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings. When this number reaches zero, the number of exposures remaining, frame count, and N icon will flash in the top control panel and a flashing g icon will appear in the viewfinder. No further pictures can be taken until you delete pictures or insert a new memory card. You may be able to take additional pictures at lower image quality or size settings. s SHOOT CUSTOM A Large-Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings, the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded down to the nearest hundred (e.g., if there is room for approximately 1,260 exposures, the exposure count display will show 1.2 K). SHOOT CUSTOM 49 A The Battery Indicator If the segments in the top control panel battery icon blink on and off, the camera is calculating the battery charge. The battery level will be displayed in about three seconds. A s Auto Meter Off At default settings, the shutter speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds (auto meter off ), reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder (pg. 56). 6s SHOOT CUSTOM SHOOT CUSTOM Exposure meters on Exposure meters off SHOOT CUSTOM Exposure meters on The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 ([Auto meter-off delay], pg. 318). A Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted, the frame count and number of exposures remaining will be displayed (some memory cards may only display this information when the camera is on). 50 Top control panel Adjust Camera Settings This tutorial describes how to take photos at default settings. 1 Check camera settings. Exposure mode Image size White balance s SHOOT CUSTOM ISO sensitivity Top control panel Image quality Rear control panel Default settings are listed below. Option Image quality Default NORM (JPEG normal) L (Large) Description Page Record JPEG images at a compression ratio 66 of roughly 1 : 8*. Ideal for snapshots. * [Size priority] selected for [JPEG compression]. FX format images are 6,048 × 4,032 pixels 70 in size. ISO sensitivity (digital equivalent of film ISO 104 100 speed) set to ISO 100. sensitivity White v White balance is adjusted automatically for 140 (Auto) natural colors under most types of lighting. balance Camera automatically adjusts shutter e Exposure 112 (Programmed speed and aperture for optimal exposure mode in most situations. auto) Image size Focus point Center focus point (singlepoint AF) 78 Focus point Viewfinder focus point display is shown above. Camera focuses on subject in center focus point when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. 51 2 Choose exposure mode e. I button Press the I button and rotate the main command dial to select exposure mode e. The camera will automatically adjust shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations. s Main command dial 3 Choose single frame release mode. Release mode dial lock release Hold the release mode dial lock release down and turn the release mode dial to S (single frame). At this setting, the camera will take one Release mode dial photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed. 4 Choose single-point AF. Rotate the AF-area mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to K (single-point AF). At this setting, the user can choose the focus point. 52 AF-area mode selector 5 Choose single-servo autofocus. Focus-mode selector Rotate the focus-mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to S (single-servo autofocus). At this setting, the camera will automatically focus on the subject in the selected focus point when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in focus. 6 Choose matrix metering. s Metering selector Press the metering selector lock button and rotate the metering selector to Y (matrix metering). Matrix metering uses information from the 1,005-segment RGB sensor to ensure optimal results for the entire frame. 53 Ready the Camera s When framing photographs in the viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left. Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable. When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation, unlock the shutter-release button for vertical shooting (pg. 5) and hold the camera as shown at right. For information on framing photographs in the monitor, see page 90. 54 Focus and Shoot 1 Press the shutterrelease button halfway to focus (pg. 56). s At default settings, the camera will focus on the subject in the center Focus Buffer focus point. Frame a indicator capacity photo in the viewfinder with the main subject positioned in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway. If the camera is able to focus, the in-focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder. Viewfinder display I 2 4 2 4 (blinks) Description Subject in focus. Focus point is between camera and subject. Focus point is behind subject. Camera unable to focus on subject in focus point using autofocus. While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, focus will lock and the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; pg. 88) will be shown in the viewfinder display. For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (pg. 82). 55 2 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. Smoothly press the shutterrelease-button the rest of the Access lamp way down to take the picture. While the photograph is being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the card slot cover will light. Do not eject the memory card, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out. s A The Shutter-Release Button The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. Focus 56 Take photograph Viewing Photographs 1 Press the K button. The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor. s 2 View additional pictures. Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing 4 or 2. To view additional information on the current photograph, press 1 and 3 (pg. 229). 1/ 10 1/ 125, F5. 6 N I KON D3X 100 85mm 0. 0 AUTO 0, 0 100NCD3X DSC_0001. JPG 15/ 12/ 2008 10: 15: 00 OR AL N ORM 6048x4032 The card containing the current photograph is indicated by an icon as shown at right. To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway. A Image Review When [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu (pg. 287), photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s (the default setting) after shooting. 57 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press the O button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted. s 1 Display the photograph. Display the photograph you wish to delete as described in “Viewing Photographs” on the previous page. K button The card containing the current photograph is indicated by an icon as shown at right. 2 Delete the photograph. Press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. O button Press the O button again to delete the image and return to playback. To exit without deleting the picture, press K. A [Delete] To delete multiple images or to delete images from the second of two memory cards, use the [Delete] option in the playback menu (pg. 281). 58 dImage Recording Options d This section describes how to choose image area, quality, and size and how to choose the role played by memory card slot 2. Image Area .........................................................................pg. 60 Image Quality.....................................................................pg. 66 Image Size...........................................................................pg. 70 Slot 2 ....................................................................................pg. 72 59 Image Area d The camera’s FX format (35.9 × 24.0 mm) image sensor can be used to record pictures with an image area (picture angle) equivalent to a 35mm (135) format film camera. Image area is selected using the [Image area] option in the shooting menu. At the default setting of [Auto DX crop], the camera will automatically crop pictures to the DX picture angle when a DX format lens is attached. The [Choose image area] option can be used to select a 35mm picture angle or to crop photographs to the DX format picture angle or to a 5 : 4 aspect ratio. ❚❚ Auto DX Crop Choose whether to automatically select a DX crop when a DX lens is attached. Option Description On Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is (default) attached. Off Crop selected for [Choose image area] is used. 60 ❚❚ Choose Image Area Choose the image area used when [Off ] is selected for [Auto DX crop] (pg. 63). Option c a Description Images are recorded in FX format using the full area of the image sensor (35.9 × 24.0 mm), producing a picture angle FX format equivalent to a Nikkor lens on a (36x24) 35mm format camera. The edges of pictures taken with DX format lenses will be blacked out. An area at the center of the image sensor 23.6 × 15.7 mm is used to record pictures in DX DX format format. To calculate the approximate focal length of the (24x16) lens in 35mm format, multiply by 1.5. 5:4 b (30x24) d Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4 (30.0 × 24.0 mm). The edges of pictures taken with DX format lenses will be blacked out. 61 A DX Lenses DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a smaller picture angle than lenses for 35mm format cameras. If [Auto DX crop] is off and [FX format (36 × 24)] or [5 :4 (30 × 24)] is selected for [Image area] when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the image may be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder, but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out. d DX format (24 × 16) image circle DX format 5:4 FX format FX format (36 × 24) image circle A The Viewfinder Display The DX format and 5 :4 crops are shown below. DX format 62 5:4 Image area can be set using the [Image area] option in the shooting menu or (at default settings) by pressing the Fn button and rotating a command dial. ❚❚ The Image Area Menu 1 Select [Image area]. Highlight [Image area] in the shooting menu (pg. 290) and press 2. 2 d Choose an option. Highlight [Auto DX crop] or [Choose image area] and press 2. 3 Adjust settings. Choose an option and press J. The selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder (pg. 62). 63 ❚❚ The Fn Button d The image area can be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating the main or subcommand dial until the desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder (pg. 62). This operation (the default option for the Fn button and command dials; pg. 336) can not be performed while a multiple exposure is being recorded (pg. 209). Fn button The option currently selected for image area can be viewed by pressing the Fn button to display the image area in the top control panel or shooting information display. FX format is displayed as “36 × 24”, DX format as “24 × 16”, and 5 : 4 as “30 × 24”. A Information Display (pg. 14) The current image area selection can be viewed by pressing the R button to display shooting information in the monitor. c is displayed when [FX format (36 × 24)] is selected, a when [DX format (24 × 16)] is selected, and b when [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] is selected. 64 Main command dial D Auto DX Crop The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is attached and [Auto DX crop] is on. A The Fn, Depth-of-Field Preview, and AE-L/AF-L Buttons Changes to image area settings can be made using the Fn button (the default setting, see Custom Setting f4, [Assign FUNC. button], pg. 333), the depth-of-field preview button (Custom setting f5, [Assign preview button]), pg. 339), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f6, [Assign AE-L/ AF-L button], pg. 340). Note that some “button press” options can not be combined with options using “+dials.” d A Image Size Image size varies with the option selected for image area. 65 Image Quality The camera supports the following image quality options. d Option File type NEF (RAW) NEF TIFF (RGB) TIFF (RGB) Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:4 (fine image quality). * JPEG fine JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:8 (normal image quality). * Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:16 (basic image quality). * JPEG basic NEF (RAW)+ JPEG fine NEF (RAW)+ JPEG normal NEF (RAW)+ JPEG basic Description Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic Format (NEF). Use with images that will be transferred to a computer for printing or processing. Note that once transferred to a computer, NEF (RAW) images can only be viewed using compatible software such as ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 391). Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is supported by a wide variety of imaging applications. NEF/ JPEG Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG image. Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality JPEG image. Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality JPEG image. * [Size priority] selected for [JPEG compression]. 66 Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the rear control panel. QUAL button Main command dial d Rear control panel A File Size See page 427 for information on the number of pictures that can be recorded at different image quality and size settings. A NEF (RAW) Recording The [NEF (RAW) recording] item in the shooting menu controls compression (pg. 69) and bit depth (pg. 69) for NEF (RAW) images. A JPEG Compression JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or optimal image quality. The [JPEG compression] option in the shooting menu can be used to choose the type of compression (pg. 68). A NEF (RAW)+JPEG If only one memory card is used, only the JPEG image will be displayed when photographs taken at [NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine], [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal], or [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic] are viewed on the camera. Deleting the JPEG image deletes the NEF (RAW) copy. If two memory cards are inserted and [RAW Slot 1-JPEG Slot 2] is selected for Slot 2, deleting the JPEG copy from the memory card in slot 2 has no effect on the NEF (RAW) copy on the memory card in slot 1 (pg. 72). A The Image Quality Menu Image quality can also be adjusted using the [Image quality] option in the shooting menu (pg. 290). 67 ❚❚ The JPEG Compression Menu The [JPEG compression] item in the shooting menu offers the following options for JPEG images: Option d 68 Description Images are compressed to produce relatively Size priority uniform file size. Quality varies with scene O (default) recorded. Optimal image quality. File size varies with P Optimal quality scene recorded. ❚❚ The NEF (RAW) Recording Menu: Type The [NEF (RAW) recording] > [Type] item in the shooting menu offers the following compression options for NEF (RAW) images: Option Lossless N compressed (default) Description NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40% with no effect on image quality. NEF images are compressed using a nonO Compressed reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about 40–55% with almost no effect on image quality. Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed. d ❚❚ The NEF (RAW) Recording Menu: NEF (RAW) Bit Depth The [NEF (RAW) recording] > [NEF (RAW) bit depth] item in the shooting menu offers the following bit-depth options for NEF (RAW) images: Option Description 12-bit q NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits. (default) NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 14 bits, r 14-bit producing files larger than 12-bit files but increasing the color data recorded. 69 Image Size Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large (the default option), Medium, or Small (note that image size varies depending on the option selected for [Image area], pg. 60): Image area d FX format (36 × 24) DX format (24 × 16) 5 : 4 (30 × 24) Option L M S L M S L M S Size (pixels) 6,048 × 4,032 4,544 × 3,024 3,024 × 2,016 3,968 × 2,640 2,976 × 1,976 1,984 × 1,320 5,056 × 4,032 3,792 × 3,024 2,528 × 2,016 Print size (cm/in.) * 76.8 × 51.2/30.2 × 20.2 57.7 × 38.4/22.7 × 15.1 38.4 × 25.6/15.1 × 10.1 50.4 × 33.5/19.8 × 13.2 37.8 × 25.1/14.9 × 9.9 25.2 × 16.8/ 9.9 × 6.6 64.2 × 51.2/25.3 × 20.2 48.2 × 38.4/19.0 × 15.1 32.1 × 25.6/12.6 × 10.1 * Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm). Print size decreases as printer resolution increases. A NEF (RAW) Images Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images. When opened in software such as ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately), NEF (RAW) images have the dimensions given for large (L-size) images in the table above. 70 Image size can be set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub-command dial until the desired option is displayed in the rear control panel. QUAL button Sub-command dial d Rear control panel A The Image Size Menu Image size can also be adjusted using the [Image size] option in the shooting menu (pg. 290). 71 Slot 2 Use the [Slot 2] option in the shooting menu (pg. 290) to choose the role played by the memory card in slot 2. Option d Overflow X (default) Y Backup RAW Slot 1- Z JPEG Slot 2 D Rear control panel Description The memory card in slot 2 is used to record photographs when the memory card in slot 1 is full. Each photograph is recorded to both memory cards. At image quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF (RAW) image is recorded to the memory card in slot 1, the JPEG image to the memory card in slot 2. At other image qualities, this option is the same as [Backup]. Backup/RAW Slot 1-JPEG Slot 2 When the above options are selected, the shutter-release will be disabled when either of the memory cards is full. The viewfinder and top control panel show the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of available memory. Voice memos (pg. 250) are appended to the copy recorded to the memory card in slot 1. 72 NFocus – Controlling How the Camera Focuses This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses. N Focus Mode ........................................................................pg. 74 AF-Area Mode ....................................................................pg. 76 Focus Point Selection .......................................................pg. 78 Focus Lock ..........................................................................pg. 80 Manual Focus .....................................................................pg. 83 73 Focus Mode N Focus mode is controlled by the Focus-mode selector focus-mode selector on the front of the camera. There are two autofocus (AF) modes, in which the camera focuses automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and one manual focus mode, in which focus must be adjusted manually using the focusing ring on the lens: Option Description Camera focuses when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus locks when in-focus indicator (I) appears S in viewfinder, and remains locked while shutter-release Single-servo button is pressed halfway (focus lock). At default settings, AF shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator is displayed (focus priority). Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If subject moves, camera will engage C predictive focus tracking (pg. 75) to predict final distance to Continuoussubject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, servo AF shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus (release priority). Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring. If M maximum aperture of lens is f/5.6 or faster, viewfinder Manual focus indicator can be used to confirm focus (electronic (pg. 83) range finding; pg. 84), but photographs can be taken at any time, whether or not subject is in focus. Choose single-servo AF for landscapes and other stationary subjects. Continuous-servo AF may be a better choice with erraticallymoving subjects. Manual focus is recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus. 74 A The B Buttons For the purpose of focusing the camera, pressing either of the B buttons has the same effect as pressing the shutter-release button halfway. B button N B button for vertical shooting A Predictive Focus Tracking In continuous-servo AF, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway or either of the B buttons is pressed. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released. A See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see Custom Setting a1 ([AF-C priority selection], pg. 305). For information on using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 ([AF-S priority selection], pg. 306). For information on preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, see Custom Setting a5 ([AF activation], pg. 309). 75 AF-Area Mode AF-area mode determines how the AF-area mode selector focus point is selected in autofocus mode (pg. 74). To select the AFarea mode, rotate the AF-area mode selector. The following options are available: N 76 Mode Description User selects focus point manually; camera focuses on K subject in selected focus point only. Use for relatively Single-point static compositions with subjects that will stay in selected AF focus point. • In continuous-servo AF (pg. 74), user selects focus point manually; if subject briefly leaves selected focus point, camera will focus based on information from surrounding points. Number of focus points used can be selected from 9, 21, and 51 using Custom Setting a3 I ([Dynamic AF area], pg. 307). If [51 points (3D-tracking)] Dynamicis selected for Custom Setting a3, focus point will be area AF selected automatically using 3D-tracking. • In single-servo AF (pg. 74), user selects focus point manually; camera focuses on subject in selected focus point only. Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point. If type G or D lens is used, camera can distinguish human subjects H from background for improved Auto-area AF subject detection. In single-servo AF, active focus points are highlighted for about one second after camera focuses. Active focus points are not displayed in continuous-servo AF. A AF-Area Mode AF-area mode is shown in the shooting information display when the R button is pressed. AF-area mode indicator AF-area mode Information display K Single-point AF N Custom Setting a3 ([Dynamic AF area], pg. 307) 9 points (default) I Dynamicarea AF* 21 points 51 points 51 points (3D-tracking) H Auto-area AF * Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation. A Manual Focus Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used. A See Also For information on the settings available in dynamic-area AF, see Custom Setting a3 ([Dynamic AF area], pg. 307). For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera, see Custom Setting a4 ([Focus tracking with lock-on], pg. 309). 77 Focus Point Selection N The camera offers a choice of 51 AF-area mode selector focus points that together cover a wide area of the frame. The focus point can be selected manually, allowing photographs to be composed with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame (single-point and dynamic-area AF), or automatically (auto-area AF; note that manual focus point detection is not available when auto-area AF is selected). To select the focus point manually: 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to ●. This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point. 2 Select the focus point. Use the multi selector to select the focus point. At default settings, the center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector. The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked (L) position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed. 78 Focus selector lock A Portrait (Tall-Orientation) Photographs When framing shots in portrait (“tall”) orientation, use the command dials to select the focus area. For more information, see Custom Setting f4 ([Assign FUNC. button], pg. 337). A See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see Custom Setting a6 ([Focus point illumination], pg. 310). For information on setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting a7 ([Focus point wrap-around], pg. 311). For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector, see Custom Setting a8 ([AF point selection], pg. 311). For information on choosing the role of the B button for vertical shooting, see Custom Setting a10 ([Vertical AF-ON button], pg. 313). For information on changing the role of the multi selector center button, see Custom Setting f1 ([Multi selector center button], pg. 331). N 79 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition. It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus (pg. 82). 1 Focus. Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to initiate focus. N 2 Check that the in-focus indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder. Single-servo AF Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indicator appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (see following page). 80 Continuous-servo AF Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both focus and exposure (an AE-L icon appears in the viewfinder, see page 125). Focus and exposure will remain locked while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you later remove your finger from the shutter-release button. Shutter-release button q w AE-L/AF-L button 3 N Recompose the photograph and shoot. Focus will remain locked between shots as long as the shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway, allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain locked between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance. A See Also For information on choosing the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f6 ([Assign AE-L/AF-L button], pg. 340). 81 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (●) may be displayed, allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, use manual focus (pg. 83) or use focus lock (pg. 80) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph. N There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background Example: subject is the same color as the background. The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera Example: subject is inside a cage. The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns Example: blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper. The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example: subject is half in the shade. Background objects appear larger than the subject Example: a building is in the frame behind the subject. The subject contains many fine details Example: a field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness. 82 Manual Focus Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus (non-AF Nikkor lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results (pg. 82). To focus manually, set the focus-mode selector to M and adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even when the image is not in focus. Focus-mode selector N A A-M Selection/Autofocus with Manual Priority If the lens supports A-M selection, set the lens A-M switch to M (manual). If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with manual override, MF priority) or A/M (autofocus with manual override, AF priority), focus can be adjusted manually, regardless of the mode selected with the lens. See the documentation provided with your lens for details. 83 The Electronic Rangefinder N If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus point can be selected from any of the 51 focus points). After positioning the subject in the selected focus point, press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the infocus indicator (I) is displayed (pg. 55). Note that with the subjects listed on page 82, the in-focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting. A Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera, measure from the focal plane mark (E) on the camera body. The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.). Focal plane mark 84 kRelease Mode – Single Frame, Continuous, Live View, Self-Timer, or Mirror Up Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a time, in a continuous sequence, with the view through the lens displayed in the monitor, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration. k Choosing a Release Mode............................................... pg. 86 Continuous Mode............................................................. pg. 88 Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)............... pg. 90 Self-Timer Mode ............................................................ pg. 100 Mirror up Mode.............................................................. pg. 102 85 Choosing a Release Mode The camera supports the following release modes: k Mode S Single frame CL Continuous low speed CH Continuous high speed a Live view E Self-timer MUP Mirror up Description Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed. While shutter-release button is held down, 1–5 frames per second *. While shutter-release button is held down, camera records up to 5 frames per second * (5–7 fps when [DX format (24 × 16)] is selected for [Image area]; see page 60). Frame pictures in monitor (pg. 90). Recommended at high or low angles or in other situations in which viewfinder is hard to use or when enlarged view in monitor can assist in obtaining very precise focus. Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake (pg. 100). Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto or close-up photography or in other situations in which the slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs (pg. 102). *Average frame rate with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, remaining settings other than Custom Setting d2 (pg. 321) at default values, and memory remaining in memory buffer. 86 To choose a release mode, press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting. Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial k 87 Continuous Mode To take pictures in CH (continuous high speed) and CL (continuous low speed) modes: 1 Select CH or CL mode. Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to CH or CL. Release mode dial k 2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. While the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down, pictures will be taken at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 ([Shooting speed], pg. 321). A Continuous High Speed In continuous high speed mode, the maximum frame rate for FX (36 × 24) format and 5 : 4 (30 × 24) images is 5 fps. The maximum frame rate for DX (24 × 16) format images can be chosen from 5, 6, and 7 fps using Custom Setting d2 ([Shooting speed], pg. 321) > [Continuous high-speed]. The maximum frame rate when recording NEF (RAW) images at a bit depth of 14 bits (pg. 69) is 1.8 fps, or 2.6 fps for DX format. A Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count displays in the viewfinder and top control panel while the shutter-release button is pressed. The illustration at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 38 pictures. 88 SHOOT CUSTOM A The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 130 photographs can be taken in succession; note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full. In rare cases, frame rate may also drop when a microdrive memory card is used. While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of the images in the buffer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card. k A See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 ([Max. continuous release], pg. 321). For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 427. 89 Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View) k Select live view (a) mode to frame pictures in the monitor. The following options are available: • Hand-held (g): Choose when taking hand-held shots of moving subjects, or when framing photographs at angles that make it difficult to use the viewfinder (pg. 91). Camera focuses normally using phase-detection autofocus. • Tripod (h): Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod (pg. 94). You can zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor for precise focus, making this option suitable for static subjects. Contrast-detect autofocus can be used to compose photographs with the subject positioned anywhere in the frame. A Phase-Detection Versus Contrast-Detect AF The camera normally uses phase-detection autofocus, in which focus is adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor. When [Tripod] is selected in live view, however, the camera uses contrast-detect autofocus, in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast. Contrast-detect autofocus takes longer than phase-detection autofocus. 90 Hand-Held Mode (g) 1 Select live view mode. Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to a. Release mode dial 2 Adjust [Live view] options in the shooting menu. Select [Live view] in the shooting menu and choose [Hand-held] for [Live view mode]. k The [Live view] menu also contains a [Release mode] option, where you can choose from single-frame and continuous release modes (pg. 86). 3 Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor instead of the viewfinder (for improved focus, focus on your subject by pressing the shutter-release button halfway, then press it the rest of the way down to start live view). To exit without taking a picture, rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press G. 91 4 Frame a picture in the monitor. To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 ×, press the N button while rotating the main command dial. N button k Main command dial While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll within the AF area brackets. 5 Focus. Autofocus (focus mode S or C): Press the shutter-release button halfway or press an B button. The camera will focus normally and set exposure. Note that the mirror will click back into place while either button is pressed, temporarily interrupting live view. Live view is restored when the button is released. Manual focus (focus mode M; pg. 83): Focus using the lens focusing ring. 92 6 Take the picture. Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to reset focus and exposure and take the picture. If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for [Release mode], the monitor will turn off while the shutter-release button is pressed. k D No Picture After shooting, play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the photograph has been recorded. Note that the sound the mirror makes when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway or an B button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of the shutter, and that pressing the shutter-release button all the way down when the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF will end live view without a photograph being recorded. 93 Tripod Mode (h) 1 Ready the camera. Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. 2 Select live view mode. Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to a. k Release mode dial 3 Adjust [Live view] options in the shooting menu. Select [Live view] in the shooting menu and choose [Tripod] for [Live view mode]. [Release mode] options can be selected as described on page 91. 4 Frame a picture in the viewfinder. B button Frame a picture in the viewfinder and select a focus point using the multi selector, then press an B button. The camera will focus normally and set exposure. Note that the camera can NOT be focused by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. 94 5 Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor. The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder. To exit without taking a picture, rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press G. 6 k Focus. Autofocus (focus mode S or C): In tripod mode, the focus point for contrast-detect autofocus can be moved to any point in the frame using the multi selector. Contrast-detect AF point To focus using contrast-detect B button autofocus, press an B button. The focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten while the camera focuses. If the camera is able to focus using contrast-detect autofocus, the focus point will be displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will blink red. D Contrast-Detect Autofocus The camera will not continue to adjust focus while an B button is pressed in continuous-servo autofocus mode. In both single-servo and continuous-servo autofocus modes, the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in focus. Manual focus (focus mode M; pg. 83): Use zoom for precise focus. 95 To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 × and check focus, press the N button while rotating the main command dial. N button Main command dial While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor. k To preview exposure at current settings, press J. In exposure modes other than h, exposure can be adjusted by pressing the E button and rotating the main command dial (note that while exposure compensation can be adjusted by ±5 EV, only values between –3 and +3 EV can be previewed in the monitor). A Exposure Preview Matrix metering is used to set exposure. Exposure can not be previewed when an optional flash unit is attached, bracketing is in effect (pg. 130), active D-lighting is on (pg. 181), or shutter speed is set to A or “p” (flash sync speed). A Remote Cords If the shutter-release button on a remote cord (available separately; see pg. 392) is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode, it will activate contrast-detect autofocus. If the remote cord shutter-release button is pressed all the way down without focusing, focus will not be adjusted before the picture is taken. 96 7 Take the picture. Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the picture. If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for [Release mode], the monitor will turn off while the shutter-release button is pressed. k D Focusing with Contrast-Detect Autofocus Contrast-detect autofocus will take longer than normal (phase-detection) autofocus. In the following situations, the camera may be unable to focus using contrast-detect autofocus: • The camera is not mounted on a tripod • The subject contains lines parallel to the long edges of the frame • The subject lacks contrast • The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness • Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodiumvapor, or similar lighting • A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used • The subject appears smaller than the focus point • The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper) • The subject is moving Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus. Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters. 97 D Shooting in Live View Mode Although they will not appear in the final picture, banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or if an object moves at high speed through the frame. Bright light sources may leave after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots may also appear. When shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry. Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed. k Live view mode can be used for up to an hour. 27s Note, however, that when used in live view mode for extended periods, the camera may become noticeably warm and the temperature of its internal circuits may rise, resulting in image noise and unusual colors. To prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits, live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats. A count-down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected. In exposure modes other than manual, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing. This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure (pg. 100). Some noise may be audible when zoom lenses are zoomed in or out or shutter speed is changed in exposure mode e or f. To reduce blur in tripod mode, choose [On] for Custom Setting d8 ([Exposure delay mode], pg. 325). If a CPU lens with an aperture ring is attached and [Aperture ring] selected for Custom Setting f7 ([Customize command dials]) > [Aperture setting] (pp. 341–342), live view will not start and the shutter release will be disabled. Select [Sub-command dial] when using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring. 98 A The Shooting Information Display To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode, press the R button. Shooting information display Virtual horizon 2 Shooting info + histogram 1, 2 Shooting information off k Framing guides 2 1 Only displayed during exposure preview (tripod mode; pg. 96). 2 Not displayed when view through lens is zoomed in. A Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the K button while the view through the monitor is displayed. Press 1 or 3 to adjust brightness (note that monitor brightness has no effect on pictures taken in live view mode). To return to live view, release the K button. Monitor brightness can not be adjusted during exposure preview (pg. 96). A HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display the view through the lens as shown at right. 99 Self-Timer Mode The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for selfportraits. To use the self-timer, mount the camera on a tripod (recommended) or place the camera on a stable, level surface and follow the steps below: 1 Select self-timer mode. Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to E. k Release mode dial 2 Frame the photograph and Focus-mode selector focus. In single-servo autofocus (pg. 74), photographs can only be taken if the in-focus (I) indicator appears in the viewfinder. A Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter In exposure modes other than manual, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing. This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure. 100 3 Start the timer. Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the timer. The self-timer lamp will start to blink, stopping two seconds before the photograph is taken. To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the release mode dial to another setting. k A A In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of A is equivalent to approximately 1/10 s. A See Also For information on changing the timer duration, see Custom Setting c3 ([Self-timer delay], pg. 319). For information on setting a beep to sound during the timer count-down, see Custom Setting d1 ([Beep], pg. 320). 101 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is recommended. 1 Select mirror up mode. Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to MUP. k Release mode dial 2 Raise the mirror. Frame the picture, focus, and then press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror. D Using the Viewfinder Note that autofocus, metering, and framing can not be confirmed in the viewfinder while mirror is raised. 3 Take a picture. Press the shutter-release button all the way down again to take a picture. To prevent blurring caused by camera movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord (pg. 392). The mirror lowers when shooting ends. A Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised. 102 SISO Sensitivity – Reacting Faster to Light “ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. This chapter describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically. Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually............................ pg. 104 S Auto ISO Sensitivity Control........................................ pg. 106 103 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 100 and ISO 1600 in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of from about 0.3–1 EV below ISO 100 and 0.3–2 EV above ISO 1600 are also available for special situations. S ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panels or viewfinder. Top control panel ISO button Rear control panel Main command dial Viewfinder ISO sensitivity: 1600 A The ISO Sensitivity Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the [ISO sensitivity] option in the shooting menu (pg. 290). 104 A ISO Sensitivity Settings The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom Setting b1 ([ISO sensitivity step value], pg. 314). Custom Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value) ISO sensitivity settings available Lo 1, Lo 0.7, Lo 0.3, 100,125,160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1, Hi 2 Lo 1, Lo 0.5, 100,140, 200, 280, 400, 560, 800, 1/2 step 1100, 1600, Hi 0.5, Hi 1, Hi 2 1 step Lo 1, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, Hi 1, Hi 2 * If possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed. If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value, ISO sensitivity will be rounded up to the nearest available setting. 1/3 step (default) S A Hi 0.3–Hi 2 The settings [Hi 0.3] through [Hi 2] correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–2 EV over ISO 1600 (ISO 2000–6400 equivalent). Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion. A Lo 0.3–Lo 1 The settings [Lo 0.3] through [Lo 1] correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3– 1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 80–50 equivalent). Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 100 or above are recommended. A See Also For information on Custom Setting b1 ([ISO sensitivity step value]), see page 314. For information using the [High ISO NR] option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 300. 105 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control S If [Off ] (the default setting) is chosen for the [ISO sensitivity auto control] option in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user (see page 104). If [On] is chosen, ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user (flash level is adjusted appropriately). The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [Maximum sensitivity] option in the [ISO sensitivity auto control] menu (the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100; note that if the value selected for [Maximum sensitivity] is lower than the value currently selected for [ISO sensitivity], the value selected for [Maximum sensitivity] will be used). In exposure modes e and g, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for [Minimum shutter speed] (1/4000–1 s). Slower shutter speeds may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for [Maximum sensitivity]. When [On] is selected, the viewfinder and rear control panel show ISO-AUTO. When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user, these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the viewfinder. 106 A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the [High ISO NR] option in the shooting menu to reduce noise (see page 300). When a flash is used, the value selected for [Minimum shutter speed] is ignored in favor of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 ([Flash sync speed], pg. 326). Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken with a flash at slow shutter speeds, in daylight, or against a bright background. Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select exposure mode g or h and choose a larger aperture. S 107 S 108 VExposure – Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure This section describes the options available to control exposure, including metering, exposure mode, exposure lock, exposure compensation, and bracketing. Metering ......................................................................... pg. 110 Exposure Mode.............................................................. pg. 112 e: Programmed Auto................................................................... f: Shutter-Priority Auto .............................................................. g: Aperture-Priority Auto ........................................................... h: Manual......................................................................................... pg. 114 pg. 116 pg. 118 pg. 120 Z Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock ............................. pg. 123 Autoexposure (AE) Lock............................................... pg. 125 Exposure Compensation.............................................. pg. 128 Bracketing....................................................................... pg. 130 109 Metering Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The following options are available: Method Z Description Recommended in most situations. Camera meters a wide a area of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution 3D color of brightness, color, distance, and composition for natural matrix II results. Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center of frame (defaults to 12-mm Z circle in center of viewfinder; if CPU Centerlens is attached, area can be selected weighted using Custom Setting b5, [CenterCenter weight area 3 weighted area], pg. 316 1). Classic meter for portraits. 2 Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter (approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is centered on current focus point, making it possible to b meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU Spot lens is used or if auto-area AF is in Spot metering area 3 effect (pg. 76), camera will meter center focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker. 2 1 When non-CPU lens is attached, average for entire frame will be used if [Average] is selected for Custom Setting b5; otherwise, center-weighted metering for non-CPU lenses will use 12-mm circle in center of viewfinder, regardless of setting selected for [Non-CPU lens data]. 2 For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in [Non-CPU lens data] menu (pg. 218). 3 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder. 110 To choose a metering method, press the metering selector lock button and rotate the metering selector until the desired mode is displayed. Metering selector Z A 3D Color Matrix II Metering In matrix metering, exposure is set using a 1005-segment RGB sensor. Use a type G or D lens for results that include range information (3D color matrix metering II; see page 384 for information on lens types). With other CPU lenses, 3D range information is not included (color matrix metering II). Color matrix metering is available when focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lens are specified using [Non-CPU lens data] item in setup menu (see page 218; center-weighted metering is used if focal length or aperture is not specified). A See Also For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center-weighted metering, see Custom Setting b5 ([Centerweighted area], pg. 316). For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method, see Custom Setting b6 ([Fine tune optimal exposure], pg. 316). 111 Exposure Mode Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available: programmed auto (e), shutter-priority auto (f ), aperture-priority auto (g), and manual (h). Mode Z Description Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for Programmed optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots e auto and in other situations in which there is little time (pg. 114) to adjust camera settings. Shutter-priority User chooses shutter speed; camera selects f auto aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur (pg. 116) motion. User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter Aperturespeed for best results. Use to blur background for g priority auto portraits or bring both foreground and (pg. 118) background into focus for landscape shots. User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Manual Set shutter speed to “A” for long timeh (pg. 120) exposures. A Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring. Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode g (aperture-priority auto) and h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode g is automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached. The exposure mode indicator (e or f ) in the top control panel will blink and g will be displayed in the viewfinder. 112 To choose the exposure mode, press the I button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the viewfinder or top control panel. I button Main command dial A Depth-of-Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold the depth-of-field preview button. The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera (modes e and f ) or the value chosen by the user (modes g and h), allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder. Preview button Z A Custom Setting e3—Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-R200, and other optional flash units that support the Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 186) will emit a modeling flash when the depth-of-field preview button is pressed. See page 327 for more information. A See Also See page 106 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control. For information on using the [Long exp. NR] option in the shooting menu for reducing noise at slow shutter speeds, see page 300. For information on choosing the size of the increments available for shutter speed and aperture, see Custom Setting b2 ([EV steps for exposure cntrl.], pg. 314). For information on changing the roles of the main and sub-command dials, see Custom Setting f7 ([Customize command dials] > [Change main/ sub], pg. 341). 113 e: Programmed Auto In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture. To take photographs in programmed auto: 1 Select exposure mode e. I button Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until e is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. Z 2 Main command dial Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. Shutter speed: 1/320 s Aperture: f/9 114 A Flexible Program In exposure mode e, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate the command dial to the right for large apertures (small f-numbers) that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion. Rotate the command dial to the Main command dial left for small apertures (large f-numbers) that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All combinations produce the same exposure. While flexible program is in effect, an asterisk (“*”) appears in the top control panel. To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the asterisk is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off. SHOOT CUSTOM Z Shutter speed: 1/2,000 s Aperture: f/3.5 Shutter speed: 1/50 s Aperture: f/22 A See Also See page 430 for information on the built-in exposure program. 115 f: Shutter-Priority Auto In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. To take photographs in shutter-priority auto: 1 Select exposure mode f. Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until f is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. Z 2 I button Main command dial Choose a shutter speed. Rotate the main command dial to choose the desired shutter speed. Shutter speed can be set to “p” (the flash sync speed limit) or to values between 30 s (q) and 1/8,000 s (o). Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects, high shutter speeds to “freeze” motion. SHOOT CUSTOM 116 Fast shutter speed (1/1,000 s) Slow shutter speed (1/10 s) Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting (see page 123). 3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. Z A See Also See page 416 for information on what to do if flashing “A” indicator appears in the shutter-speed displays. 117 g: Aperture-Priority Auto In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. To take photographs in aperture-priority auto: 1 Select exposure mode g. Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until g is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. Z 2 Main command dial Choose an aperture. Rotate the subcommand dial to choose the desired aperture from values between the minimum and maximum for the lens. 118 I button SHOOT CUSTOM Sub-command dial Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of field (see page 113), bringing both foreground and background into focus. Large apertures (low f-numbers) soften background details in portraits or other compositions that emphasize the main subject. Small aperture (f/36) Large aperture (f/2.8) Aperture can be locked at the selected setting (see page 124). 3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. Z A Non-CPU Lenses If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in setup menu (pg. 218) when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current f-number will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F, with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must be read from the lens aperture ring. SHOOT CUSTOM 119 h: Manual In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. To take photographs in manual exposure mode: 1 Select exposure mode h. Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until h is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. Z 120 2 I button Main command dial Choose aperture and shutter speed. Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “p” (the flash sync speed limit) or to values between 30 s and 1/8,000 s, or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A, pg. 122). Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens. Check exposure in the electronic analog exposure displays (see page 122), and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is achieved. Sub-command dial Setting aperture SHOOT CUSTOM Setting shutter speed SHOOT CUSTOM Main command dial Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected setting (see pages 123, 124). 3 Z Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. Shutter speed: 1/250 s Aperture: f/8 A AF Micro Nikkor Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture. 121 A Electronic Analog Exposure Displays The electronic analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and top control panel show whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 ([EV steps for exposure cntrl.], pg. 314), the amount of under- or overexposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash. Optimal exposure Custom Setting b2 set to [1/3 step] Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV Control panel Viewfinder A Z Long Time-Exposures At a shutter speed of A, the shutter will remain open while the shutter-release button is held down. Use for long time-exposure photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks. Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL4a battery or an optional EH-6 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. Note that noise and distortion may be present in long exposures; before shooting, choose [On] for the [Long exp. NR] option in the shooting menu (pg. 300). A Shutter speed: 35 s Aperture: f/25 See Also See Custom Setting f10 ([Reverse indicators], pg. 345) for information on reversing the electronic analog exposure display. 122 Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock The F button can be used to lock shutter speed at the value selected in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, or to lock aperture at the value selected in aperture-priority auto and manual exposure modes. Lock is not available in programmed auto. ❚❚ Shutter-Speed Lock To lock shutter speed at the selected value, press the F button and rotate the main command dial until R icons appear in the viewfinder and the top control panel. Z F button Main command dial To unlock shutter speed, press the F button and rotate the main command dial until the R icons disappear from the displays. SHOOT CUSTOM 123 ❚❚ Aperture Lock To lock aperture at the selected value, press the F button and rotate the sub-command dial until R icons appear in the viewfinder and the top control panel. F button Sub-command dial To unlock aperture, press the F button and rotate the sub-command dial until the R icons disappear from the displays. SHOOT CUSTOM Z 124 Autoexposure (AE) Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure. 1 Select center-weighted or spot metering (pg. 110). Metering selector Matrix metering will not produce the desired results with autoexposure lock. If using center-weighted metering, select the center focus point with the multi selector (pg. 78). 2 Lock exposure. Z Shutter-release button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutterq release button halfway. With the shutter-release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock exposure (and focus, except in manual w focus mode). Confirm that the in-focus indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder. AE-L/AF-L button While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will appear in the viewfinder. 125 3 Recompose the photograph. Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot. Z 126 A Metered Area In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 4-mm (0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In center-weighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in the center of the viewfinder (the default area for center-weighted metering is shown by the 12-mm circle in the viewfinder). A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed without altering the metered value for exposure: Exposure mode e f g Settings Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; pg. 115) Shutter speed Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and top control panel. Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to metering take effect when the lock is released). Z A See Also If [On] is selected for Custom Setting c1 ([Shutter-release button AE-L], pg. 318), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For information on changing the role of the AE-L/AF-L button, see Custom Setting f6 ([Assign AE-L/AF-L button], pg. 340). 127 Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. In exposure mode h, only the exposure information shown in the electronic analog exposure display is affected; shutter speed and aperture do not change. To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the viewfinder or top control panel. E button Z Main command dial ±0 EV (E button pressed) 128 –0.3 EV +2.0 EV Exposure compensation can be set to values between –5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV. In general, choose positive values to make the subject brighter, negative values to make it darker. –1 EV No exposure compensation +1 EV At values other than ±0, the 0 at the center of the electronic analog exposure displays will flash and a E icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel after you release the E button. The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the electronic analog exposure display by pressing the E button. Z Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off. A See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 ([EV steps for exposure comp.], pg. 314). For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b4 ([Easy exposure compensation], pg. 315). 129 Bracketing The camera offers three types of bracketing: exposure bracketing, flash bracketing, and white balance bracketing. In exposure bracketing (pg. 131), the camera varies exposure compensation with each shot, while in the case of flash bracketing (pg. 131), flash level is varied with each shot (i-TTL and, in the case of the SB-900 and SB-800, auto aperture flash control modes only; see pages 186 and 189). Only one photograph is produced each time the shutter is released, meaning that several shots are required to complete the bracketing sequence. Exposure and flash bracketing are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure and there is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot. Z In white balance bracketing (pg. 135), the camera creates multiple images each time the shutter is released, each with a different white balance adjustment. Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence. White balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or experimenting with different white balance settings. A See Also At default settings, the camera varies both exposure and flash level. Custom Setting e4 ([Auto bracketing set], pg. 328) is used to choose the type of bracketing performed. 130 ❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing 1 Select flash or exposure bracketing. Choose the type of bracketing to be performed using Custom Setting e4 ([Auto bracketing set], pg. 328). Choose [AE & flash] to vary both exposure and flash level (the default setting), [AE only] to vary only exposure, or [Flash only] to vary only flash level. 2 Choose the number of shots. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The number of shots is shown in the top control panel. Number of shots BKT button Z Top control panel Main command dial Exposure and flash bracketing indicator At settings other than zero, a M icon and exposure and flash bracketing indicator will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. 131 3 Select an exposure increment. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the exposure increment. Exposure increment BKT button Sub-command dial Top control panel At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV. The bracketing programs with an increment of 1/3 EV are listed below. Z Control panel display No. of shots 0 Bracketing order (EVs) 0 3 +0.3/0/+0.7 3 –0.3/–0.7/0 2 0/+0.3 2 0/–0.3 3 0/–0.3/+0.3 5 0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7 0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/ +0.7/+1.0 0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/ +0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3 7 9 A See Also For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see Custom Setting b2 ([EV steps for exposure cntrl.], pg. 314). For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed, see Custom Setting e6 ([Bracketing order], pg. 330). 132 4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation (see page 128), making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV. While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot. SHOOT CUSTOM Z SHOOT CUSTOM Exposure increment: 0 EV Exposure increment: –1 EV Exposure increment: +1 EV 133 ❚❚ Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (pg. 204), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated. A Z Exposure and Flash Bracketing In single frame and self-timer modes, one shot will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on. A Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed (aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). When [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [ISO sensitivity auto control] in shooting menu and no flash is attached, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded. Custom Setting e5 ([Auto bracketing (mode M)], pg. 329) can be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone. 134 ❚❚ White Balance Bracketing 1 Select white balance bracketing. Choose [WB bracketing] for Custom Setting e4 [Auto bracketing set] (pg. 328). 2 Choose the number of shots. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The number of shots is shown in the top control panel. Number of shots Z BKT button Top control panel Main command dial WB bracketing indicator At settings other than zero, a WB bracketing indicator will appear in the top control panel and a W icon will be displayed in the top and rear control panels. 135 3 Select a white balance increment. Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired. White balance increment BKT button Sub-command dial Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3 (15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber (pg. 144). The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below. Z Control panel display A No. of White balance shots increment 0 1 Bracketing order (EVs) 0 3 1B 1B/0/2B 3 1A 1A/2A/0 2 1B 0/1B 2 1A 0/1A 3 1 A, 1 B 0/1A/1B 5 1 A, 1 B 7 1 A, 1 B 9 1 A, 1 B 0/2A/1A/1B/2B 0/3A/2A/1A/ 1B/2B/3B 0/4A/3A/2A/1A/ 1B/2B/3B/4B See Also See page 145 for a definition of “mired.” 136 Top control panel 4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a different white balance. Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning. If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining, the number of exposures remaining, frame count, and N icon will flash in the top control panel, a flashing g icon will appear in the viewfinder, and the shutter release will be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted. SHOOT CUSTOM Z 137 ❚❚ Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and W are no longer displayed in the control panels. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (pg. 204), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Z A White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF (RAW). Selecting [NEF (RAW)], [NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine], [NEF (RAW)+JPEG normal], or [NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic] cancels white balance bracketing. White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, pg. 144). No adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis. In self-timer mode (pg. 100), the number of copies specified in the whitebalance program will be created each time the shutter is released. If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded. 138 rWhite Balance – Keeping Colors True The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source. The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source, with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade, direct sunlight, or under incandescent lighting. Unlike the film used in film cameras, digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white balance.” This chapter covers white balance settings. White Balance Options................................................. pg. 140 r Fine-Tuning White Balance.......................................... pg. 143 Choosing a Color Temperature................................... pg. 147 Preset Manual ................................................................ pg. 148 139 White Balance Options For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting. The following options are available: Option Auto (default) 3,500– 8,000* J Incandescent 3,000* v r I Fluorescent Sodium-vapor lamps 2,700* Warm-white fluorescent White fluorescent 3,000* Cool-white fluorescent 4,200* Day white fluorescent 5,000* Daylight fluorescent 6,500* High temp. mercuryvapor 7,200* H Direct sunlight 140 Color temp. (K) 3,700* 5,200* Description White balance is adjusted automatically using color temperature measured by image sensor and 1,005-segment RGB sensor. For best results, use type G or D lens. If optional flash unit is used, white balance reflects conditions in effect when the flash goes off. Use under incandescent lighting. Use under following seven light sources: Use under sodium-vapor lighting (found in sports venues). Use under warm-white fluorescent lights. Use under white fluorescent lights. Use under cool-white fluorescent lights. Use under daylight white fluorescent lights. Use under daylight fluorescent lights. Use under high color temperature light sources (e.g. mercury-vapor lamps). Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight. Option N Flash G Cloudy M Shade K Choose color temp. L Preset manual Color temp. (K) Description 5,400* Use with optional flash units. 6,000* Use in daylight under overcast skies. Use in daylight with subjects in the 8,000* shade. 2,500– Choose color temperature from list of 10,000 values (pg. 147). Use subject, light source, or existing — photograph as reference for white balance (pg. 148). * All values are approximate. Fine-tuning set to 0. Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance. White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the rear control panel. r Rear control panel WB button Main command dial A The White Balance Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the [White balance] option in the shooting menu (pg. 290). A I (Fluorescent) Selecting I (fluorescent) with the WB button and main command dial selects the type of bulb chosen for the [Fluorescent] option in the white balance menu (pg. 290). 141 A Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units. Choose a color temperature, use preset white balance, or set white balance to [Flash] and use fine tuning to adjust white balance. A Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5,000– 5,500K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue. A r 142 See Also When [WB bracketing] is selected for Custom Setting e4 ([Auto bracketing set], pg. 328), the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See page 130 for more information. Fine-Tuning White Balance White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is fine tuned using the [White balance] option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial. ❚❚ The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance option. Select [White balance] in the shooting menu (pg. 290), then highlight a white balance option and press 2. If an option other than [Fluorescent], [Choose color temp.], or [Preset manual] is selected, proceed to Step 2. If [Fluorescent] is selected, highlight a lighting type and press 2. If [Choose color temp.] is selected, highlight a color temperature and press 2. If [Preset manual] is selected, choose a preset as described on page 157 before proceeding. r 143 2 Fine tune white balance. Use the multi selector to finetune white balance. White balance can be fine tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and the green (G)–magenta (M) Coordinates Adjustment axis. The horizontal (amberblue) axis corresponds to color temperature, with each increment equivalent to about 5 mired. The vertical (greenmagenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation (CC) filters. Increase green Green (G) Blue (B) r Increase magenta Amber (A) Magenta (M) Increase blue 3 Press J. Press J to save settings and return to the shooting menu. If white balance has been fine-tuned on the A-B axis, a E icon will be displayed in the rear control panel. 144 Increase amber J button A White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue. A “Mired” Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.: • 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired • 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired r 145 ❚❚ The WB Button At settings other than K ([Choose color temp.]) and L ([Preset manual]), the WB button can be used to fine-tune white balance on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (pg. 144; to fine-tune white balance when K or L is selected, use the shooting menu as described on page 143). Six settings in both directions are available; each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired (pg. 145). Press the WB button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed in the rear control panel. Rotating the sub-command dial to the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the sub-command dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B). At settings other than 0, a E icon appears in the rear control panel. r Rear control panel WB button 146 Sub-command dial Choosing a Color Temperature When K ([Choose color temp.]) is selected for white balance, color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial. The color temperature is displayed in the rear control panel: Rear control panel WB button Sub-command dial r D Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting. Choose N ([Flash]) or I ([Fluorescent]) for these sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate. A The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu. Note that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub-command dial replaces the value selected in the white balance menu. 147 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two methods are available for setting preset white balance: Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under Direct lighting that will be used in final photograph and measurement white balance is measured by camera (pg. 150). Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory photograph card (pg. 155). r 148 The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d-0 through d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset (pg. 159). d-0 Stores last value measured for white balance (pg. 150). This preset is overwritten when a new value is measured. d-1–d-4 Store values copied from d-0 (pg. 154). Store values copied from images on memory card (pg. 155). r A White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks (pg. 291). A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank (no warning is displayed for preset d-0). 149 ❚❚ Measuring a Value for White Balance 1 Light a reference object. Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance; in exposure mode h, adjust exposure so that the electronic analog exposure displays shows ±0 (pg. 122). 2 Set white balance to L ([Preset manual]). Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until L is displayed in the rear control panel. r WB button 150 Main command dial Rear control panel 3 Select direct measurement mode. Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the L icon starts to flash. A flashing D will also appear in the top control panel and viewfinder. At default settings, the displays will flash for about six seconds. SHOOT CUSTOM Top control panel Rear control panel Viewfinder 4 Measure white balance. Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter-release button all the way down. The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d-0. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus. r 151 5 Check the results. If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance, C will flash in the control panels, while the viewfinder will show a flashing a. At default settings, the displays will flash for about six seconds. Top control panel Rear control panel Viewfinder If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a will appear in the control panels and viewfinder (at default settings, the displays will flash for about six seconds). Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to Step 4 and measure white balance again. r Top control panel Rear control panel Viewfinder 6 Select preset d-0. If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately, select preset d-0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial until d-0 is displayed in the rear control panel. 152 D Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 ([Auto meter-off delay], pg. 318). The default setting is six seconds. A Preset d-0 The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d-0, automatically replacing the previous value for this preset (no confirmation dialog will be displayed). A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list. To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has been measured for white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5,200 K, the same as [Direct sunlight]). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0 until white balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five white balance values can be stored (pg. 154). r 153 ❚❚ Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d-0 to any of the other presets (d-1–d-4). 1 Select L ([Preset manual]). Highlight [Preset manual] in the white balance menu (pg. 140) and press 2. 2 Select a destination. Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-4) and press the center of the multi selector. r 3 Copy d-0 to the selected preset. Highlight [Copy d-0] and press J. If comment has been created for d-0 (pg. 159), the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset. 154 ❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only) Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the memory card to a selected preset (d-1–d-4 only). Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset d-0. 1 Select L ([Preset manual]). Highlight [Preset manual] in the white balance menu (pg. 140) and press 2. 2 Select a destination. Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-4) and press the center of the multi selector. 3 r Choose [Select image]. Highlight [Select image] and press 2. 155 4 Highlight a source image. Highlight the source image. To view the highlighted image full frame, press the N button. If two memory cards are inserted, the slot can be selected by holding the N button and pressing 1. The menu shown at right will be displayed (pg. 228); highlight the desired slot and press J. 5 r Copy white balance. Press the center of the multi selector to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset. If the highlighted photograph has a comment (pg. 350), the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset. A Choosing a White Balance Preset Press 1 to highlight the current white balance preset (d-0– d-4) and press 2 to select another preset. 156 ❚❚ Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value: 1 Select L ([Preset manual]). Highlight [Preset manual] in the white balance menu (pg. 140) and press 2. 2 Select a preset. Highlight the desired preset and press the center of the multi selector. To select the highlighted preset and display fine tuning menu (pg. 143) without completing the next step, press J instead of pressing the center of the multi selector. 3 r Select [Set]. Highlight [Set] and press 2. Fine tuning menu for the selected white balance preset is displayed (pg. 143). 157 A Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button At a setting of L ([Preset manual]), presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial. The current preset is displayed in the rear control panel while the WB button is pressed. Rear control panel WB button r 158 Sub-command dial ❚❚ Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset. 1 Select L ([Preset manual]). Highlight [Preset manual] in the white balance menu (pg. 140) and press 2. 2 Select a preset. Highlight the desired preset and press the center of the multi selector. 3 Select [Edit comment]. r Highlight [Edit comment] and press 2. 4 Edit the comment. Edit the comment as described on page 292. 159 r 160 JImage Enhancement This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation and hue using Picture Controls, how to preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D-lighting, and how to choose a color space. Picture Controls ............................................................. pg. 162 Creating Custom Picture Controls .......................................... pg. 170 Active D-Lighting .......................................................... pg. 181 Color Space..................................................................... pg. 183 J 161 Picture Controls Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings among compatible devices and software. Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings, or make independent adjustments to sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue. These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be recalled or edited at will. Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory card for use in compatible software, and software-created Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera. Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system. J 162 ❚❚ Using Picture Controls Picture Controls can be used as described below. • Select Nikon Picture Controls (pg. 164): Select an existing Nikon Picture Control. • Modify existing Picture Controls (pg. 166): Modify an existing Picture Control to create a combination of sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue for a particular scene or effect. • Create custom Picture Controls (pg. 170): Store modified Picture Controls under unique names and recall or edit them as desired. • Share custom Picture Controls (pg. 174): Custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be saved to the memory card for use in ViewNX (supplied) and other compatible software, or software-created custom Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera. • Manage custom Picture Controls (pg. 177): Rename or delete custom Picture Controls. J A Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls. In addition to the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera, optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon websites. Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Nikon Picture Controls. Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among compatible devices and software. 163 Selecting Nikon Picture Controls The camera offers four preset Nikon Picture Controls. Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene. Option Q R S T Description Standard processing for balanced results. Standard Recommended for most situations. Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for Neutral photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched. Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize primary Vivid colors. Monochrome Take monochrome photographs. ❚❚ Choosing a Picture Control 1 Select [Set Picture Control]. In the shooting menu (pg. 290), highlight [Set Picture Control] and press 2. J 2 Select a Picture Control. Highlight the desired Picture Control and press J. 164 A The Picture Control Grid Pressing the N button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed when [Monochrome] is selected). To select a different Picture Control, press 1 or 3, then press 2 to display Picture Control options and press J. A The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information display when the R button is pressed. Picture Control indicator J 165 Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced combination of settings using [Quick adjust], or make manual adjustments to individual settings. 1 Select a Picture Control. Highlight the desired Picture Control in the [Set Picture Control] menu (pg. 164) and press 2. 2 Adjust settings. Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a value (pg. 167). Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted, or select [Quick adjust] (pg. 167) to choose a preset combination of settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O button. J 3 A Press J. Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk (“U”) in the [Set Picture Control] menu. 166 ❚❚ Picture Control Settings Option Manual adjustments (all Picture Controls) Description Choose from options between [–2] and [+2] to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments). For Quick adjust example, choosing positive values for [Vivid] makes pictures more vivid. Not available with [Neutral], [Monochrome], or custom Picture Controls. Control the sharpness of outlines. Select [A] to adjust sharpening automatically according to the type of Sharpening scene, or choose from values between [0] (no sharpening) and [9] (the higher the value, the greater the sharpening). Select [A] to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from values between [–3] and [+3] (choose lower values to prevent highlights in Contrast portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast subjects). Choose [–1] for reduced brightness, [+1] for enhanced Brightness brightness. Does not affect exposure. Control the vividness of colors. Select [A] to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene, Saturation or choose from values between [–3] and [+3] (lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it). Choose negative values (to a minimum of [–3]) to make reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more Hue yellow, positive values (up to [+3]) to make reds more orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple. Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome Filter photographs. Choose from [Off ] (the default setting), effects yellow, orange, red, and green (pg. 169). Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from [B&W] (black-and-white, the default setting), [Sepia], Toning [Cyanotype] (blue-tinted monochrome), [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue Green], [Blue], [Purple Blue], and [Red Purple] (pg. 169). Manual adjustments (non-monochrome only) J Manual adjustments (monochrome only) 167 D Active D-Lighting [Contrast] and [Brightness] can not be adjusted when Active D-Lighting (pg. 181) is on. Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost when Active D-Lighting is turned on. D “A” (Auto) Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame. Use a type G or D lens for best results. The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid. A The Picture Control Grid Pressing the N button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed when [Monochrome] is selected). Release the N button to return to the Picture Control menu. J A Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a reference when adjusting settings. 168 A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only) The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available: Y O R G Option Yellow Orange Red Green Description Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange. Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits. Note that the effects achieved with [Filter effects] are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters. A Toning (Monochrome Only) Pressing 3 when [Toning] is selected displays saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available when [B&W] (black-and-white) is selected. A Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based. J 169 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls. 1 Select [Manage Picture Control]. In the shooting menu (pg. 290), highlight [Manage Picture Control] and press 2. 2 Select [Save/edit]. Highlight [Save/edit] and press 2. J 170 3 Select a Picture Control. Highlight an existing Picture Control and press 2, or press J to proceed to step 5 to save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification. 4 Edit the selected control. See page 167 for more information. To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press the O button. Press J when settings are complete. 5 Select a destination. Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2. J 171 6 Name the Picture Control. Keyboard area Name area The text-entry dialog shown at right will be displayed. By default, new Picture Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control. This name can be edited to create a new name as described below. To move the cursor in the name area, press the N button and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button. J Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters long. Any characters after the 19th will be deleted. After entering the name, press J. The new Picture Control will appear in the Picture Control list. Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the [Rename] option in the [Manage Picture Control] menu. 172 A Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are not affected by [Reset shooting menu] (pg. 293). Custom Picture Controls do not have a [Quick adjust] option (pg. 167). Custom Picture Controls based on [Monochrome] have [Filter effects] and [Toning] options in place of [Saturation] and [Hue] controls. A The Original Picture Control Icon The Nikon Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display. Original Picture Control icon J 173 Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software. ❚❚ Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera 1 Select [Load/save]. In the [Manage Picture Control] menu, highlight [Load/save] and press 2. 2 Select [Copy to camera]. Highlight [Copy to camera] and press 2. J 3 Select a Picture Control. Highlight a custom Picture Control and either; • press 2 to view current Picture Control settings, or • press J to proceed to Step 4. 174 4 Select a destination. Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2. 5 Name the Picture Control. Name the Picture Control as described on page 172. The new Picture Control will appear in the Picture Control list and can be renamed at any time using the [Rename] option in the [Manage Picture Control] menu. J A Use Slot 1 Slot 1 is used when saving custom Picture Controls to a memory card or copying custom Picture Controls to the camera. Cards in slot 2 can not be used. 175 ❚❚ Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card 1 Select [Copy to card]. After displaying the [Load/ save] menu as described in Step 1 on page 174, highlight [Copy to card] and press 2. 2 Select a Picture Control. Highlight a custom Picture Control and press 2. 3 Choose a destination. Choose a destination from slots 1 through 99 and press J to save the selected Picture Control to the memory card. Any Picture Controls that may already have been saved to the selected slot will be overwritten. J A Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card. 176 Managing Custom Picture Controls Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls. ❚❚ Renaming Custom Picture Controls 1 Select [Rename]. In the [Manage Picture Control] menu, highlight [Rename] and press 2. 2 Select a Picture Control. Highlight a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2. 3 Rename the Picture Control. J Rename the Picture Control as described on page 172. 177 ❚❚ Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera 1 Select [Delete]. In the [Manage Picture Control] menu, highlight [Delete] and press 2. 2 Select a Picture Control. Highlight a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2. 3 Select [Yes]. Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete the selected Picture Control. J A Nikon Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera ([Standard], [Neutral], [Vivid], and [Monochrome]) can not be renamed or deleted. 178 ❚❚ Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card 1 Select [Load/save]. In the [Manage Picture Control] menu, highlight [Load/save] and press 2. 2 Select [Delete from card]. Highlight [Delete from card] and press 2. J 179 3 Select a Picture Control. Highlight a custom Picture Control (slot1 through 99) and either: • press 2 to view current Picture Control settings, or • press J to display confirmation dialog shown at right. 4 J 180 Select [Yes]. Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete the selected Picture Control. Active D-Lighting Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting off Active D-Lighting: Auto J Active D-Lighting off Active D-Lighting: High 181 To use Active D-Lighting: 1 Select [Active D-Lighting]. In the shooting menu (pg. 290), highlight [Active D-Lighting] and press 2. 2 Choose an option. Highlight an option and press J. Choose [Auto] to let the camera automatically select [High], [Normal], or [Low] according to shooting conditions. J D Active D-Lighting When Active D-Lighting is on, the capacity of the memory buffer drops and additional time is required to record images (pg. 429). Matrix metering is recommended (pg. 110). Although exposure is in fact reduced to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows, highlights, underexposed areas, and mid-tones are automatically adjusted to prevent the resulting photograph from being underexposed. The [Brightness] and [Contrast] Picture Control settings (pg. 167) can not be adjusted while Active D-Lighting is in effect. Noise, distortion, or banding may be visible at high ISO sensitivities. In exposure mode h, an Active D-Lighting setting of [Auto] is equivalent to [Normal]. D “Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting” The [Active D-Lighting] option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the [D-Lighting] option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting. 182 Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera. Option Description Choose for photographs that will be printed or W sRGB (default) used “as is,” with no further modification. This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than sRGB, making it the preferred X Adobe RGB choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched. 1 Select [Color space]. Highlight [Color space] in the shooting menu (pg. 290) and press 2. 2 Select a color space. J Highlight the desired option and press J. 183 A Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is widely used, while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options, but colors will not be as vivid. JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 compliant; applications and printers that support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 will select the correct color space automatically. If the application or device does not support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0, select the appropriate color space manually. An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space, allowing applications that support color management to automatically select the correct color space. For more information, see the documentation provided with the application or device. J A Nikon Software The following Nikon software automatically selects the correct color space when opening photographs created with the D3X: ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately). 184 lFlash Photography – Using Optional Flash Units This chapter describes how to use the camera with optional flash units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS). The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ............... pg. 186 Compatible Flash Units ................................................ pg. 187 CLS-Compatible Flash Units ..................................................... pg. 187 Other Flash Units .......................................................................... pg. 191 i-TTL Flash Control......................................................... pg. 193 Flash Modes.................................................................... pg. 194 FV Lock ............................................................................ pg. 198 l Flash Contacts................................................................ pg. 201 185 The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) l Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography. The Creative Lighting System supports the following features: • i-TTL flash control: Improved through-the-lens (TTL) flash control for use with CLS (see page 193). Flash level is set using monitor pre-flashes to measure the light reflected by the subject, ensuring that the level is adjusted appropriately for ambient lighting. • Advanced Wireless Lighting: Allows i-TTL flash control with remote wireless flash units. • FV lock (pg. 198): Locks flash level at the metered value, allowing a series of photographs to be taken at the same flash level. • Auto FP High-Speed Sync (pg. 197): Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field. The CLS-compatible D3X can be used for flash photography when an optional Speedlight is mounted on the camera’s accessory shoe. A flash can be used not only when natural lighting is inadequate, but also to fill in shadows, illuminate back-lit subjects, and even to add a catch light to the eyes of a portrait subject. See the Speedlight manual for details. 186 Compatible Flash Units CLS-Compatible Flash Units The D3X can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units: the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-R200, and SU-800. ❚❚ The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 The principal features of these flash units are listed below. Flash unit Feature SB-900 1 3 34/111 Guide No. Auto power zoom 17–200 (mm) Wide panel (mm) 12, 14, 17 Head rotation SB-800 38/125 SB-600 30/98 SB-400 21/69 SB-R200 2 10/33 24–105 24–85 —4 —5 14, 17 14 — 7 ° down, 7 ° down, 90 ° up, 90 ° up, 90 ° up, 180 ° left, 180 ° left, 180 ° left, 90 ° right and right 90 ° right — 60 ° down (toward lens light axis), 90 ° up 45 ° up (away from light axis) 1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when v or N (flash) is selected for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately. 2 Controlled remotely using optional SB-900 or SB-800 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander. 3 ISO 100, m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-900 with standard illumination. 4 27 mm zoom coverage. 5 24 mm zoom coverage. l ❚❚ SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash. 187 A Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture. For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft.; its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet, 125÷5.6=23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4). l 188 The following features are available with the SB-900, SB-800, SB600, SB-400, SB-R200, and SU-800: Flash unit Flash mode/feature i-TTL balanced fill-flash i-TTL for digital SLR AA Auto aperture A Non-TTL auto GN Range-priority manual M Manual RPT Repeating flash Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7 FV lock AF-assist for multi-area AF 8 Flash Color Information Communication REAR Rear-curtain sync Y Red-eye reduction Auto zoom Advanced Wireless Lighting Commander Remote SB-900 SB-900 SB-900 SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200 ✔2 ✔2 ✔3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔4 ✔6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — — — ✔ — ✔ ✔ ✔ — — — — — — ✔ — ✔5 ✔5 — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔5 — — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔5 ✔5 — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — — — — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — — — — ✔ — ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — — — — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔ — — ✔ — — ✔ — — 1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units. 2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit. 3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering. 4 Selected with flash unit. Non-TTL auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using [Non-CPU lens data]. 5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit. Non-TTL auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using [Non-CPU lens data]. 6 Selected with flash unit. 7 Select [1/250 s (Auto FP)] for Custom Setting e1 ([Flash sync speed], pg. 326). 8 CPU lens required. l 189 A The WG-AS1 Water Guard The optional WG-AS1 is a water guard that covers the base of SB-900 flash units mounted on the D3X, increasing the SB-900’s splash resistance by protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and spray. A Modeling Illumination CLS-compatible Speedlights such as the SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 emit a modeling flash when the camera depth-of-field preview button is pressed. This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units. Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom Setting e3 [Modeling flash] (pg. 327). l 190 Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. If they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button will lock and no photographs can be taken. Speedlight Flash mode A Non-TTL auto M Manual G Repeating flash REAR Rear-curtain sync SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28, SB-26, SB-25, SB-24 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ SB-50DX — ✔ — ✔ SB-30, SB-27 1, SB-23, SB-29 2, SB-22s, SB-22, SB-21B 2, SB-20, SB-29s 2 SB-16B, SB-15 ✔ — ✔ ✔ — — ✔ ✔ 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto flash). 2 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60 mm, 105 mm, or 200 mm). l D Notes on Optional Speedlights Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System, refer to the section on CLScompatible digital SLR cameras. The D3X is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals. i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 1600. At values over 1600, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed. 191 The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction in redeye reduction and slow sync with red-eye reduction modes, while the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination when the conditions for AF-assist illumination are met. When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 17–135 mm, the SB-900 provides AF-assist illumination (active AF-assist illumination) for all focus points; note, however, that autofocus is available only with the following focus points: 17–19 mm 20–105 mm 106–135mm When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24–105 mm, the SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination to assist autofocus for the following focus points: 24–34 mm 35–49 mm 50–105mm In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below: Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of: l 100 200 400 800 1600 4 4.8 5.6 6.7 8 For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped down by half an f-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens. When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor. In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure. 192 i-TTL Flash Control When a CLS-compatible flash unit is set to TTL, the camera automatically selects one of the following types of flash control: i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash unit emits series of nearly invisible preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash. Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 1,005-segment RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum aperture; see pg. 218). Not available when spot metering is used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected. l 193 Flash Modes The camera supports the following flash modes: Flash mode Description This mode is recommended for most situations. In programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes, shutter speed will automatically be set to values Front-curtain between 1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8,000 to 1/60 s with Auto FP sync High-Speed Sync). Slow sync Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to capture both subject and background at night or under dim light. This mode is only available in exposure modes e and g. Tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake. In exposure modes f and h, flash fires just before the shutter closes. Use to create effect of a stream of light behind moving objects. In exposure modes e and g, slow rear-curtain sync is used to capture both subject Rear-curtain and background. Tripod is recommended to prevent sync blurring caused by camera shake. l Red-eye reduction 194 In this mode (available only with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400), red-eye reduction pre-flash lights for approximately one second before main flash. Pupils in subject’s eyes to contract, reducing “red-eye” effect sometimes caused by flash. Owing to one-second shutter-release delay, this mode is not recommended with moving subjects or in other situations in which quick shutter response is required. Avoid moving camera while red-eye reduction pre-flash is lit. Flash mode Description Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery. Available only with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 Red-eye in exposure modes e and g. Tripod is recommended to reduction with prevent blurring caused by camera shake. slow sync l 195 ❚❚ Choosing a Flash Mode To choose the flash mode, press the M button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode is selected in the top control panel: M button Front-curtain sync l Slow sync 1 Red-eye reduction with slow sync 3, 4 Main-command dial Rear-curtain sync 2 Red-eye reduction 3 1 Available only in exposure modes e and g. In modes f and h, frontcurtain sync is selected when M button is released. 2 In exposure modes e and g, flash-sync mode will be set to slow rear-curtain sync when the M button is released. 3 Y icon blinks if flash unit does not support red-eye reduction. 4 Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes e and g. In modes f and h, red-eye reduction is selected when the M button is released. 196 A Studio Flash Systems Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the correct synchronization can not be obtained. A Shutter Speed and Aperture Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when a Speedlight is used: Mode Shutter speed e Set automatically by camera (1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2 f Value selected by user (1/250 s–30 s) 2 g Set automatically by camera (1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2 h Value selected by user (1/250 s–30 s) 2 Aperture Set automatically by camera Value selected by user 3 See page 114 116 118 120 1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes. 2 Speeds as fast as 1/8,000 s are available with optional SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 flash units when [1/250 s (Auto FP)] is selected for Custom Setting e1 ([Flash sync speed], pg. 326). 3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. When setting aperture in exposure modes g and h, consult the table of flash ranges provided with optional Speedlight. l A See Also For information on choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1 ([Flash sync speed], pg. 326). For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2 ([Flash shutter speed], pg. 327). 197 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV lock is available with CLS compatible flash units only. To use FV lock: 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button. Select [FV lock] for Custom Setting f4 ([Assign FUNC. button] > [FUNC. button press], pg. 333). 2 l Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit. Mount an SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, or SU-800 on the camera accessory shoe. 3 Set the flash unit to TTL or AA mode. Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL or AA. See the Speedlight instruction manual for details. 198 4 Focus. Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. 5 Lock flash level. After confirming that the flash ready indicator (M) is displayed in the viewfinder, press the Fn button. The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level. Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock icons (P and e) will appear in the top control panel and viewfinder. 6 Fn button SHOOT CUSTOM Recompose the photograph. l 7 Take the photograph. Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock. 199 8 Release FV lock. Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock icons (P and e) are no longer displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder. l A Metering The metering areas for FV lock are as follows: Speedlight Stand-alone flash unit Used with other flash units (Advanced Wireless Lighting) A Flash mode i-TTL AA i-TTL AA A (master flash) Metered area 5-mm circle in center of frame Area metered by flash exposure meter Entire frame Area metered by flash exposure meter See Also For information on using the depth-of-field preview or AE-L/AF-L button for FV lock, see Custom Setting f5 ([Assign preview button], pg. 339) or Custom Setting f6 ([Assign AE-L/AF-L button], pg. 340). 200 Flash Contacts The camera is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows flash units to be connected via a sync cable. When an optional flash unit is attached, the flash will fire whenever the shutter is released. ❚❚ The Accessory Shoe Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly on the camera without a sync cable (pg. 187). The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400. ❚❚ The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as required. Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear-curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe. l D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized service representative for more information. 201 l 202 tOther Shooting Options This chapter covers restoring default settings, making multiple exposures, interval timer photography, and using GPS units and non-CPU lenses. Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings........ pg. 204 Multiple Exposure ......................................................... pg. 206 Interval Timer Photography........................................ pg. 211 Non-CPU Lenses ............................................................ pg. 218 Using a GPS Unit............................................................ pg. 221 t 203 Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the ISO and WB buttons down together for more than two seconds (these buttons are marked by a green dot). The control panels turn off briefly while settings are reset. Option Focus point Exposure mode Flexible program Exposure compensation AE hold Aperture lock t 204 Default Center Programmed auto Off Off Off 1 Off Option Shutter-speed lock Bracketing Flash mode FV lock Multiple exposure ISO WB button button Default Off Off 2 Front-curtain sync Off Off 1 Custom Setting f6 ([Assign AE-L/AF-L button], pg. 340) is unaffected. 2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV (exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only settings in the bank currently selected using the [Shooting menu bank] option will be reset (pg. 291). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected. Option Image quality Image size Default JPEG Normal Large Option White balance ISO sensitivity Default Auto * 100 * Fine-tuning off. If the current Picture Control has been modified, existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored. t A See Also See page 422 for a list of default settings. 205 Multiple Exposure Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting, and produce results with colors noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor. ❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure Note that at default settings, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s. 1 Select [Multiple exposure]. Highlight [Multiple exposure] in the shooting menu (pg. 290) and press 2. 2 Select [Number of shots]. Highlight [Number of shots] and press 2. t A Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, select [On] for the [Image review] (pg. 287) option in the playback menu and extend the monitor-off delay using Custom Setting c4 ([Monitor off delay], pg. 319). The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4. 206 3 Select the number of shots. Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press J. 4 Select [Auto gain]. Highlight [Auto gain] and press 2. 5 Set gain. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description Gain adjusted according to number of exposures actually On recorded (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 (default) exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc.). Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure. Off Recommended if background is dark. t 207 6 Select [Done]. Highlight [Done] and press J. A n icon will be displayed in the top control panel. To exit without taking a multiple exposure, select [Multiple exposure] > [Reset] in the shooting menu. 7 t Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. In continuous high-speed and continuous lowspeed release modes (pg. 86), the camera will record all exposures in a single burst. In single-frame release mode, one photograph will be taken each time the shutterrelease button is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded (for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded, see page 210). The n icon will blink until shooting ends. When shooting ends, multiple exposure mode will end and the n icon will no longer be displayed. Repeat steps 1–7 to take additional multiple exposures. 208 SHOOT CUSTOM SHOOT CUSTOM D Multiple Exposure Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure. Live view (pg. 90) can not be used to record multiple exposures. The information listed in the playback photo information display (including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot in the multiple exposure. If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. A Voice Memos The camera stores only the last voice memo created during a multiple exposure. A Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end. Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting. A Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect, memory cards can not be formatted and the following can not be changed: image area, bracketing, and shooting menu options other than [White balance] and [Interval timer shooting] (note that [Interval timer shooting] can only be adjusted before the first exposure is taken). The [Lock mirror up for cleaning] and [Dust off ref photo] options in the setup menu can not be used. t 209 ❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting [Multiple exposure] in the shooting menu while a multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown at right. To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken, highlight [Cancel] and press J. If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken, a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. If [Auto gain] is on, gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if: • A two-button reset is performed (pg. 204) • The camera is turned off • The battery is exhausted • Pictures are deleted t 210 Interval Timer Photography The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals. 1 Select [Interval timer shooting]. Highlight [Interval timer shooting] in the shooting menu (pg. 290) and press 2. 2 Select a starting trigger. Highlight one of the following [Choose start time] options and press 2. • [Now]: Shooting begins about 3 s after settings are completed (proceed to Step 4). • [Start time]: Choose a start time (see Step 3). D Before Shooting Choose single-frame (S), continuous low speed (CL), or continuous high speed (CH) release mode when using the interval timer. Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor. Remember that the camera will focus before each shot—no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF. t Before choosing a starting time, select [World time] in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date (pg. 40). Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged. 211 3 Choose a start time. Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours or minutes; press 1 or 3 to change. The starting time is not displayed if [Now] is selected for [Choose start time]. 4 Choose an interval. Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours, minutes, or seconds; press 1 or 3 to change. Note that the camera will not be able to take photographs at the specified interval if it is shorter than the shutter speed or the time required to record images. 5 t 212 Choose the number of intervals and number of shots per interval. Press 4 or 2 to highlight number of intervals or number of shots; press 1 or 3 to change. The total number of shots that will be taken is displayed to the right. Number of Number Total of shots/ number of intervals interval shots 6 Start shooting. Highlight [Start] > [On] and press J (to return to the shooting menu without starting the interval timer, highlight [Start] > [Off] and press J). The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken. A message will be displayed in the monitor one minute before each series of shots is taken. If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of A is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the monitor. t A The Viewfinder Eyepiece In exposure modes other than manual, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure. 213 D Out of Memory If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (pg. 215) after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card. D Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If exposure and/or flash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program. A During Shooting During interval timer photography, the Q icon in the top control panel will blink. Immediately before the next shooting interval begins, the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining, and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval. At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off ). SHOOT CUSTOM t 214 To view current interval timer settings, select [Interval timer shooting] between shots. While interval timer photography is in progress, the interval timer menu will show the starting time, the shooting interval, and the number of intervals and shots remaining. None of these items can be changed while interval timer photography is in progress. ❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval time photography can be paused by: • Pressing the J button between intervals • Highlighting [Start] > [Pause] in the interval timer menu and pressing J • Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off ) • Selecting live view (a), self-timer (E), or mirror-up (MUP) release modes To resume shooting: 1 Choose a new starting trigger. Choose a new starting trigger and start time as described on page 211. 2 Resume shooting. Highlight [Start] > [Restart] and press J. Note that if interval timer photography was paused during shooting, any shots remaining in the current interval will be canceled. t 215 ❚❚ Interrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted. Interval timer photography can also be ended by: • Selecting [Start] > [Off ] in the interval timer menu • Performing a two button reset (pg. 204) • Selecting [Reset shooting menu] in the shooting menu (pg. 293) • Changing bracketing settings (pg. 130) Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends. ❚❚ No Photograph Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph is yet to be taken, the memory buffer or memory card is full, or the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF (note that the camera focuses again before each shot). t A Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high speed) mode, photographs will be taken at a rate of five shots per second or, if [DX format (24 × 16)] is selected for [Image area], at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 [Shooting speed] (pg. 321) > [Continuous high-speed]. In S (single frame) and CL (continuous low-speed), photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2 [Shooting speed] (pg. 321) > [Continuous low-speed]. A Using the Monitor Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval. 216 A Shooting Menu Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks (pg. 291). If shooting menu settings are reset using the [Reset shooting menu] item in the shooting menu (pg. 290), interval timer settings will be reset as follows: • Choose start time: Now • Interval: 00:01':00" • Number of intervals: 1 • Number of shots: 1 • Start shooting: Off t 217 Non-CPU Lenses By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU lens. If the focal length of the lens is known: • Automatic power zoom can be used with SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 Speedlights (available separately) • Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display When the maximum aperture of the lens is known: • The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder • Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture • Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display t Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens: • Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses, including Reflex-Nikkor lenses) • Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR A Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens. A Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. After changing the zoom position, select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture. 218 ❚❚ The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu 1 Select [Non-CPU lens data]. Highlight [Non-CPU lens data] in the setup menu (pg. 346) and press 2. 2 Select a lens number. Highlight [Lens number] and press 4 or 2 to choose a lens number between 1 and 9. 3 Select a focal length. Highlight [Focal length (mm)] and press 4 or 2 to choose a focal length between 6 and 4,000 mm. 4 Select a maximum aperture. t Highlight [Maximum aperture] and press 4 or 2 to choose a maximum aperture between f/1.2 and f/22. The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens. 219 5 Select [Done]. Highlight [Done] and press J. The specified focal length and aperture will be stored under the chosen lens number. This combination of focal length and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens number using camera controls as described below. ❚❚ Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls 1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera control. Select [Choose non-CPU lens number] as the “+command dials” option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu. Non-CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f4, [Assign FUNC. button], pg. 333), the depth-of-field preview button (Custom Setting f5, [Assign preview button], pg. 339), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f6, [Assign AE-L/AF-L button], pg. 340). t 2 Use the selected control to choose a lens number. Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the top control panel. Focal length Maximum aperture Main command dial 220 Lens number Using a GPS Unit A GPS unit can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal, allowing the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading to be recorded with each photograph taken. The camera can be used with an optional GP-1 GPS unit (see below; note that the GP-1 does not provide the compass heading), or with third-party units connected via an optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord (pg. 222). ❚❚ The GP-1 GPS Unit The GP-1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nikon digital cameras. For information on connecting the unit, see the manual provided with the GP-1. t 221 ❚❚ Other GPS Units Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or 3.01 of the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format can be connected to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal using an MC-35 GPS adapter cord (available separately; pg. 393). Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector. These devices connect to the MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub 9pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device. See the MC-35 instruction manual for details. Before turning the camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode (4800 baud). t 222 MC-35 ❚❚ The k Icon When the camera establishes communication with a GPS device, a k icon will be displayed in the top control panel. Photo information for pictures taken while the k icon is displayed will include a page of GPS data (pg. 238), including the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading (if supported). If no data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds, the k icon will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS information. SHOOT CUSTOM t A GPS Data GPS data are only recorded when the k icon is displayed. Confirm that the k icon is displayed in the top control panel before shooting. A flashing k icon indicates that the GPS device is searching for a signal; pictures taken while the k icon is flashing will not include GPS data. SHOOT CUSTOM 223 ❚❚ Setup Menu Options The [GPS] item in the setup menu contains the options listed below. • [Auto meter off]: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached. Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Enable [Auto meter-off delay]. This reduces the drain on the (default) battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down without pausing. Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is Disable connected; GPS data will always be recorded. • [Position]: This item is only available if a GPS device is connected, when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading (if supported) as reported by the GPS device. t A Heading The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is equipped with a digital compass (note that the GP-1 is not equipped with a compass). Keep the GPS device pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least 20 cm (8 in.) from the camera. A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock. 224 IMore About Playback – Playback Options This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details the operations that can be performed during playback. Full-Frame Playback...................................................... pg. 226 Photo Information ........................................................ pg. 229 Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback ...... pg. 241 Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ....................... pg. 243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion .................... pg. 244 Deleting Individual Photographs............................... pg. 245 I 225 Full-Frame Playback To play photographs back, press the K button. The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor. Multi selector Sub-command dial O button K button G button N button L button J button H button I Main command dial A Rotate Tall To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation, select [On] for the [Rotate tall] option in the playback menu (pg. 287). Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image review (pg. 228). 226 To Use Description View additional photographs Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view photographs in reverse order. View photo information Press 1 or 3 to view information about current photograph (pg. 229). View thumbnails N+ See page 241 for more information on the thumbnail display. Zoom in on photograph N+ See page 243 for more information on playback zoom. Delete images O Record/play voice memo H Change protect status L View images on other memory card Return to shooting mode Display menus Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to delete photo (pg. 245). If voice memo has not been recorded, voice memo will be recorded while H button is pressed. If voice memo has been recorded, pressing H button will start playback (pg. 248). To protect image, or to remove protection from protected image, press L button (pg. 244). If two memory cards are inserted, choose memory card from which pictures are played back (pg. 228). N+ /K G I Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately. See page 277 for more information. 227 A Image Review When [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu (pg. 287), photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 20 s (the default setting) after shooting (because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not rotated automatically during image review). In single-frame, self-timer, and mirror-up release modes, photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken. In continuous release mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in the current series displayed. A Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted, holding the N button and pressing 1 in full-frame or thumbnail playback will display the menu shown at right. Highlight the desired slot and press J. The same method can be used to choose a slot when selecting images for operations in the playback (pg. 278) or retouch menus (pg. 363) or when choosing an image as the source for preset white balance (pg. 156). A See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 [Monitor off delay] (pg. 319). I 228 The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the 1 and 3 buttons display other images and the 4 and 2 buttons control photo information. See Custom Setting f3 [Photo info/playback] (pg. 332) for details. Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. There are up to 9 pages of information for each photo. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that shooting data, RGB histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for [Display mode] (pg. 282; shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photograph as described on page 357). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken. 1/ 10 1/ 10 N I KON D3X LAT I TUDE LONGI TUDE 1/ 125, F5. 6 100 85mm 0. 0 AUTO 100NCD3X DSC_0001. JPG 15/ 12/ 2008 10: 15: 00 N OR ORMAL AL 6048x4032 File information ALT I TUDE T I ME (UTC) : 105. 17º HEADING 0, 0 100NCD3X DSC_0001. JPG 15/ 12/ 2008 10: 15: 00 N OR ORMAL AL 6048x4032 :N : 35º 35. 971' :E : 13 9º 43. 696' : 35m : 15 / 12 /2008 : 01 : 15 : 00 N I KON D3X Overview data 100-1 GPS data 100-1 I Highlights 100-1 MTR, SPD, AP. EXP. MODE, I SO , EXP. TUN I NG FOCAL LENGTH LENS AF / VR FLASH MODE, N I KON D3X RGB histogram : , 1/ 125, F5. 6 : , 100 : 0, 0, : 85mm : 85 / 1. 4 :S : 100-1 Shooting data pages 1–3 ARTI S T : NIKON TARO COPYRI GHT : NI KON N I KON D3X 100-1 Shooting data page 4 229 ❚❚ File Information 1 2 3 4 5 6 1/ 10 15 14 13 100NCD3X DSC_0001. JPG 15/ 12/ 2008 10: 15: 00 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 Voice memo icon ..................... 248 Protect status ............................ 244 Retouch indicator .................... 363 Focus point 1 .............................. 282 AF area brackets...................47, 92 Frame number/ total number of frames 7 Image quality ...............................66 10 9 N OR ORMAL AL 6048x4032 7 8 8 Image size ..................................... 70 9 Image area 2 ................................. 60 10 Image authentication .............356 11 Time of recording....................... 40 12 Date of recording ....................... 40 13 Slot number.................................. 42 14 Folder name ...............................293 15 File name .....................................296 1 Displayed only if [Focus point] is selected for [Display mode] (pg. 282). 2 Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. I 230 ❚❚ Highlights 1 1 2 3 5 6 100-1 4 7 1 2 3 4 Voice memo icon ..................... 248 Protect status ............................ 244 Retouch indicator .................... 363 Highlight display indicator... 282 5 Image highlights 2 ...................282 6 Folder number–frame number 3 ......................................293 7 Current channel 2 1 Displayed only if [Highlights] is selected for [Display mode] (pg. 282). 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed) for current channel. Press 4 or 2 while pressing N button to cycle through channels as follows: RGB (all channels) R (red) G (green) B (blue) 3 Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] (a) or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] (b) was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. I 231 ❚❚ RGB Histogram 1 1 2 3 8 4 9 5 100-1 10 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 I Voice memo icon ...................... 248 6 Histogram (RGB channel) 4. In all histograms, horizontal axis gives Protect status ............................. 244 pixel brightness, vertical axis Retouch indicator ..................... 363 number of pixels. Image highlights 2 .................. 282 7 Current channel 2 Folder number–frame 4 number 3 ...................................... 293 8 Histogram (red channel) 9 Histogram (green channel) 4 10 Histogram (blue channel) 4 1 Displayed only if [RGB histogram] is selected for [Display mode] (pg. 282). 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed) for current channel. Press 4 or 2 while pressing N button to cycle through channels as follows: RGB (all channels) R G (red) (green) Highlight display off B (blue) 3 Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] (a) or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] (b) was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. 232 4 Some sample histograms are shown below: • If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively even. • If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the left. • If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to the right. Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor. I A Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications. 233 ❚❚ Shooting Data Page 1 1 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 MTR, SPD, AP. EXP. MODE, I SO , EXP. TUN I NG FOCAL LENGTH LENS AF / VR FLASH MODE, N I KON D3X 11 1 2 3 4 Voice memo icon ..................... 248 Protect status ............................ 244 Retouch indicator .................... 363 Metering method .................... 110 Shutter speed...................116, 120 Aperture.............................118, 120 5 Exposure mode ........................ 112 ISO sensitivity 2 ......................... 104 6 Exposure compensation ....... 128 Optimal exposure tuning 3 ... 316 7 Focal length ............................... 386 I 234 : , 1/ 8000, F2. 8 : , Hi 0. 3 : + 1. 3, +5 / 6 : 85mm : 85 / 1. 4 :C : Optional, TTL, +1. 3 SLOW 100-1 12 13 8 Lens data .....................................218 9 Focus mode .................................. 74 Lens VR (vibration reduction) 4 ...........382 10 Flash mode .................................194 Flash compensation Commander mode 5 11 Camera name 12 Image area 6 ................................. 60 13 Folder number–frame number 6 ......................................293 1 Displayed only if [Data] is selected for [Display mode] (pg. 282). 2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on. 3 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 ([Fine tune optimal exposure]) has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method. 4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached. 5 Displayed only if optional flash unit SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 is used. 6 Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. ❚❚ Shooting Data Page 2 1 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 3 WHI TE BALANCE COLOR SPACE P I CTURE CTRL QUI CK ADJUST SHARPENING CONTRAST BR IGHTNESS SATURAT ION HUE N I KON D3X 13 1 2 3 4 Voice memo icon ..................... 248 Protect status ............................ 244 Retouch indicator .................... 363 White balance ........................... 140 Color temperature................... 147 White balance fine-tuning ... 143 Preset manual .......................... 148 5 Color space................................. 183 6 Picture Control.......................... 162 7 Quick adjust 2 ............................ 167 Original Picture Control 3 ...... 173 1 2 3 4 5 6 : , A6, M1 : Adobe RGB : STANDARD :0 :3 :0 :0 :0 :0 100-1 14 15 8 Sharpening .................................167 9 Contrast .......................................167 10 Brightness ...................................167 11 Saturation 4 .................................167 Filter effects 5..............................167 12 Hue 4 ..............................................167 Toning 5 ........................................167 13 Camera name 14 Image area 6 ................................. 60 15 Folder number–frame number 6......................................293 Displayed only if [Data] is selected for [Display mode] (pg. 282). [Standard] and [Vivid] Picture Controls only. [Neutral], [Monochrome], and custom Picture Controls. Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls. Monochrome Picture Controls only. Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. I 235 ❚❚ Shooting Data Page 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 NOI SE REDUC. ACT. D- L I GHT . V IGNETT E CTRL RETOUCH 8 COMMENT N I KON D3X 9 : HI I SO/ LONG EXP. : NORMAL : NORMAL : D- L I GHT ING : WARM F I LTER : CYANOTYPE : TR I M : SPR ING HAS COME. SP : R ING HAS COME. 3636 100-1 10 11 1 2 3 4 Voice memo icon ..................... 248 6 Vignette control........................299 Protect status ............................ 244 7 Retouch history.........................363 Retouch indicator .................... 363 8 Image comment .......................350 High ISO noise reduction...... 300 9 Camera name Long exposure noise 10 Image area 2 ................................. 60 reduction .................................... 300 11 Folder number–frame 5 Active D-Lighting..................... 181 number 2......................................293 1 Displayed only if [Data] is selected for [Display mode] (pg. 282). 2 Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. I 236 ❚❚ Shooting Data Page 4 1 1 2 3 4 ARTIST : NIKON TARO 5 COPYRI GHT : NI KON N I KON D3X 6 1 2 3 4 5 Voice memo icon ..................... 248 Protect status ............................ 244 Retouch indicator .................... 363 Name of photographer......... 357 Copyright holder..................... 357 100-1 7 8 6 Camera name 7 Image area 2 ................................. 60 8 Folder number–frame number 2......................................293 1 Displayed only if [Data] is selected for [Display mode] (pg. 282) and copyright information was appended to photograph (pg. 357). 2 Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. I 237 ❚❚ GPS Data 1 1 4 2 3 LAT I TUDE 5 LONGI TUDE 6 7 ALT I TUDE T I ME (UTC) 8 HEADING N I KON D3X 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 :N : 35º 35. 971' :E : 13 9º 43. 696' : 35m : 15 / 12 /2008 : 01 : 15 : 00 : 105. 17º 100-1 10 11 Voice memo icon ..................... 248 7 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) Protect status ............................ 244 2 Retouch indicator .................... 363 8 Heading 9 Camera name Latitude 10 Image area 3 ................................. 60 Longitude 11 Folder number-frame Altitude number 3 ......................................293 1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (pg. 221). 2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass. 3 Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. I 238 ❚❚ Overview Data 1 2 3 1/ 10 4 N I KON D3X 5 17 16 15 14 13 12 6 1/ 8000, F2. 8 Hi 0. 3 + 1. 3 –1. 3 REAR 10000 A6, M1 L 100NCD3X DSC_0001. JPG 15/ 12/ 2008 10: 15: 00 1 Frame number/ total number of frames 2 Voice memo icon ..................... 248 3 Protect status ............................ 244 4 Camera name 5 Retouch indicator .................... 363 6 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image (pg. 233). Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness, vertical axis shows number of pixels of each brightness in image. 85mm N OR ORMAL AL 6048x4032 7 8 9 10 11 7 ISO sensitivity 1 ..........................104 8 Focal length................................386 9 GPS data indicator ...................221 10 Image comment indicator ....350 11 Flash mode .................................194 12 Flash compensation 13 Exposure compensation........128 14 Metering method.....................110 15 Exposure mode .........................112 16 Shutter speed .................. 116, 120 17 Aperture ............................ 118, 120 I 1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on. 239 1/ 10 30 29 28 N I KON D3X 1/ 8000, F2. 8 Hi 0. 3 + 1. 3 –1. 3 REAR 10000 A6, M1 L 100NCD3X DSC_0001. JPG 15/ 12/ 2008 10: 15: 00 27 26 25 18 Picture Control........................... 162 19 Active D-Lighting...................... 181 20 File name ..................................... 296 21 Image quality ................................66 22 Image size.......................................70 23 Image area 2 ...................................60 24 Image authentication indicator....................................... 356 25 Time of recording ........................40 85mm 24 23 20 N OR ORMAL AL 6048x4032 22 18 19 21 26 Folder name ................................293 27 Date of recording ........................ 40 28 Slot number................................... 42 29 White balance.............................140 Color temperature ....................147 White balance fine-tuning .....143 Preset manual ............................148 30 Color space ..................................183 2 Displayed in yellow if [DX format (24 × 16)] or [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] was selected for the [Image area] option (pg. 60) in the shooting menu. I 240 Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback To display images in “contact sheets” of four or nine images, press the N button and rotate the main command dial. Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback I 241 The following operations can be performed while thumbnails are displayed: To Change number of images displayed Description Press N button and rotate main command to left to display one, four, or nine images per page. N+ Toggle full frame playback Press center of multi selector to switch back and forth between full frame and thumbnail playback. Highlight images Use multi selector to highlight images for full-frame playback, playback zoom (pg. 243), or deletion (pg. 245). Page through images Delete highlighted photo Record/play voice memo Change protect status of highlighted photo I Use View images on other memory card Press N button and rotate subcommand dial to scroll through images a page at a time. N+ O See page 245 for more information. H See page 248 for more information. L See page 244 for more information. Return to shooting mode Display menus A If two memory cards are inserted, choose memory card from which pictures are played back (pg. 228). N+ /K G Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately. See page 277 for more information. See Also For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector, see Custom Setting f1 [Multi selector center button] (pg. 331). 242 Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom Press the N button and rotate the main command dial right to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback. The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect: To Zoom in or out View other areas of image Use Description Press N button to display frame showing area currently zoomed in. While N button is pressed, main command dial can be used to control size of frame— rotate dial left to zoom out, right to zoom 36 × 24 (3 : 2) format images in up to 27 × (large images), 20 × (medium images) or 13 × (small images). Release N button to magnify selected area to fill monitor. Use multi selector to view area not visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. N+ N+ Rotate main command dial to view same location in other images at current zoom ratio. View other images Change protect status Return to shooting mode Display menus L I See page 244 for more information. /K G Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately. See page 277 for more information. 243 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted using the O button or the [Delete] option in the playback menu. Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (pp. 45, 347). To protect a photograph: 1 Select an image. Display the image in fullframe playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list. 2 Press the L button. The photograph will be marked with a a icon. To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted, display the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the L button. I A Voice Memos Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos that may have been recorded with the images. Voice memo overwrite status can not be set separately. A Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the [Playback folder] menu, press the L and O buttons together for about two seconds. 244 Deleting Individual Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or the photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. Once deleted, photographs can not be recovered. 1 Select an image. Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list. 2 Press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback To delete the photograph, press the O button again. To exit without deleting the photograph, press the K button. I 245 A Voice Memos If a voice memo has been recorded with the selected image, the confirmation dialog shown at right will be displayed when the O button is pressed. • [Image/sound]: Select this option and press the O button to delete both photo and voice memo. • [Sound only]: Select this option and press the O button to delete only the voice memo. To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo, press K. A See Also To delete multiple images, use the [Delete] option in the playback menu (pg. 281). The [After delete] option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted (pg. 287). I 246 eVoice Memos – Recording and Playback The camera is equipped with a built-in microphone, allowing voice memos to be added to photographs. Voice memos can be played back over the camera’s built-in speaker. Recording Voice Memos .............................................. pg. 248 Playing Voice Memos.................................................... pg. 253 e 247 Recording Voice Memos Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to photographs using the built-in microphone. Readying the Camera for Recording Before recording voice memos, choose the desired options for the [Voice memo] (pg. 248), [Voice memo overwrite] (pg. 249), and [Voice memo button] (pg. 249) options in the setup menu. ❚❚ Voice Memo This option controls whether voice memos are recorded automatically or manually. The following options are available: e 248 Option Description Y Off (default) Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode. Selecting this option displays menu shown at right; select maximum recording time from 5 (default), 10, 20, 30, 45, On or 60 s. Unless [On] is Z (Auto and selected for [Image review] in manual) playback menu (pg. 287), recording will begin when shutter-release button is released after shooting. Recording ends when H button is pressed or after specified recording time has ended. Manual Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph a only by pressing and holding H button (pg. 250). ❚❚ Voice Memo Overwrite This option controls whether the voice memo for the most recent photograph can be overwritten in shooting mode. The following options are available: Option Description Voice memo can not be recorded in Disable shooting mode if one already exists for (default) most recent image. Voice memo can be recorded in shooting mode even if one already Enable exists for most recent image (pg. 250). Existing memo will be deleted and replaced by new memo. ❚❚ Voice Memo Button This option controls manual recording. The following options are available: Option Description Press and Voice memo is recorded while H b hold button is held down. Recording (default) will end automatically after 60 s. Recording begins when H Press to button is pressed and ends c start/ when H button is pressed again. Recording will end stop automatically after 60 s. e A Voice Memo The option selected for [Voice memo] is indicated by an icon in the rear control panel. On (auto and manual) Manual only 249 Automatic Recording (Shooting Mode) If [On (Auto and manual)] is selected for [Voice memo] (pg. 248), a voice memo will be added to the most recent photograph when shooting ends. Recording will end when the H button is pressed or after the specified recording time has ended. Manual Recording (Shooting Mode) If [On (Auto and manual)] or [Manual only] is selected for [Voice memo] (pg. 248), a voice memo can be recorded for the most recent photograph by pressing and holding the H button. A voice memo will be recorded while the button is held down (note that no voice memo will be recorded if the H button is not held down for at least one second). e H button D Automatic Recording Voice memos will not be recorded automatically if [On] is selected for the [Image review] option (pg. 287) in the playback menu. A voice memo can however be added to the photograph displayed during image review even if [Off ] is selected for the [Voice memo] option in the setup menu. D Slot 2 If two memory cards are inserted and [Backup] or [RAW Slot 1-JPEG Slot 2] is selected for the [Slot 2] option (pg. 72) in the shooting menu, voice memos will be associated with the images recorded to the memory card in slot 1. 250 Playback Mode To add a voice memo to the photograph currently displayed in full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list (pg. 226): 1 Choose a photograph. Display or highlight the photograph. Only one voice memo can be recorded per image; additional voice memos can not be recorded for images already marked with a h icon. 2 Press and hold the H button. A voice memo will be recorded while the H button is held down (note that no voice memo will be recorded if the H button is not held down for at least one second). H button A During Recording During recording, the C icons in the rear control panel will blink. A countdown timer in the rear control panel shows the length of the voice memo that can be recorded (in seconds). Rear control panel e In playback mode, a C icon is displayed in the monitor during recording. 251 A Interrupting Recording Recording will end automatically if: • The G button is pressed to display the menus • The K button is pressed • The shutter-release button is pressed halfway • The camera is turned off During interval timer photography, recording will end automatically about two seconds before the next photograph is taken. A After Recording If a voice memo has been recorded for the most recent photograph, a C icon will be displayed in the rear control panel. Rear control panel If a voice memo exists for the photograph currently selected in playback mode, a h icon will be displayed in the monitor. A Voice Memo File Names Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form “xxxxnnnn.WAV,” where “xxxxnnnn” is a file name copied from the image with which the voice memo is associated. For example, the voice memo for the image “DSC_0002.JPG” would have the file name “DSC_0002.WAV.” Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer. e 252 Playing Voice Memos Voice memos can be played back over the camera’s built-in speaker when the associated image is viewed in full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list (pp. 226, 242). The presence of a voice memo is indicated by an h icon. To Press Start/end playback H Delete voice memo O Description Press H to start playback. Playback will end when H button is pressed again or entire memo has been played back. Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press 1 or 3 to highlight option, press O to select. • [Image/sound]: Delete both photo and voice memo. • [Sound only]: Delete voice memo only. To exit without deleting image or voice memo, press the K button. e A Interrupting Playback Playback will end automatically if: • The G button is pressed to display the menus • The monitor is turned off by pressing the K button or by pressing the shutter-release button halfway • The camera is turned off • Another image is selected 253 Voice Memo Playback Options The [Audio output] option in the setup menu controls whether voice memos are played back over the camera’s built-in speaker or by a device to which the camera is connected via an HDMI or audio/video cable. When sound is played back over the built-in speaker, the [Audio output] option also controls playback volume. Option d Via speaker (default) Description Voice memos are played back over built-in speaker. Selecting this option displays menu shown at right. Press 1 or 3 to change volume. Beep will sound when option is selected. Press J to make selection and return to setup menu. HDMI/audioAudio signal output to HDMI or A/V-OUT terminal. video output Voice memos are not played back. b icon is displayed when photo for which voice memo exists f Off is viewed in monitor. e e 254 QConnections – Connecting to External Devices This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer, how to print pictures, and how to view them on a television set. Connecting to a Computer ........................................... pg. 256 Direct USB Connection ................................................................ pg. 258 Wireless and Ethernet Networks .............................................. pg. 261 Printing Photographs .................................................... pg. 262 Direct USB Connection ................................................................ pg. 263 Viewing Photographs on TV ........................................ pg. 274 Standard Definition Devices...................................................... pg. 274 High-Definition Devices.............................................................. pg. 276 Q 255 Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable. Once the camera is connected, Nikon Transfer (supplied) or optional Nikon software such as Camera Control Pro 2 can be used to copy photographs to the computer or control the camera remotely. Q D Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. A Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; pg. 391) can be used to control the camera from a computer. Before connecting the camera, set the camera [USB] option (pg. 257) to [MTP/PTP]. When Camera Control Pro 2 is running, “c” will be displayed in the top control panel. 256 ❚❚ Before Connecting the Camera Install the necessary software from the supplied installer CD (see the Install Guide for more information). To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately). Before connecting the camera, select the [USB] option in the camera setup menu (pg. 352) and choose a USB option from [MTP/PTP] (default) and [Mass Storage] as described below. Operating system * • Windows Vista Service Pack 1 (32-bit Home Basic/Home Premium/ Business/Enterprise/Ultimate editions) • Windows XP Service Pack 3 (Home Edition/Professional) Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, or 10.5.5) Nikon Transfer Camera Control Pro 2 Choose [MTP/PTP] or [Mass Storage] Choose [MTP/PTP] * See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on supported operating systems. Q 257 Direct USB Connection Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable. 1 Select a USB option. Before connecting the camera to the computer, make sure the correct option is selected for the [USB] item in the camera setup menu (pg. 257). 2 Turn the camera off. 3 Turn the computer on. Power switch Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up. 4 Connect the USB cable. Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Q 258 D The USB Cable Clip To prevent cable from being disconnected, fasten the clip as shown. D USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard. 5 Turn the camera on. Power switch If [Mass Storage] is selected for [USB] (pg. 257), c will be displayed in the control panels and viewfinder, and the PC connection indicator will flash in the top control panel (camera displays do not change if [MTP/PTP] is selected). 6 Transfer photographs. Transfer photographs to the computer as described in the online help for Nikon Transfer. To view the online help, start Nikon Transfer and select [Nikon Transfer help] from the Nikon Transfer [Help] menu. Q D During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. 259 7 Turn the camera off. If [MTP/PTP] is selected for [USB], the camera can be turned off and the USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete. If [Mass Storage] is selected, the camera must first be removed from the system as described below. Windows Vista Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon ( ) in the taskbar and select [Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device] from the menu that appears. Windows XP Home Edition / Windows XP Professional Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon ( ) in the taskbar and select [Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device] from the menu that appears. Mac OS X Drag the camera volume (“NIKON D3X”) into the Trash. Q 260 Wireless and Ethernet Networks If the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter is attached, photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately). The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes: Mode Function Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp Transfer mode server. Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before select mode upload. Control camera from computer using Camera Control PC mode Pro 2 (available separately). Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network Print mode computer. For more information, see the WT-4 user’s manual. Be sure to update to the latest versions of the WT-4 firmware and supplied software. D USB Select [MTP/PTP] for the camera [USB] option (pg. 257) before connecting a WT-4 wireless transmitter. Q D WT-4A/B/C/D/E The principal difference between the WT-4 and WT-4A/B/C/D/E is in the number of channels supported; unless otherwise stated, all references to the WT-4 also apply to the WT-4A/B/C/D/E. 261 Printing Photographs Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods: • Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG photographs directly from the camera (pg. 263). • Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot (see the printer manual for details). If the printer supports DPOF (pg. 440), photographs can be selected for printing using [Print set (DPOF)] (pg. 272). • Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center. If the center supports DPOF (pg. 440), photographs can be selected for printing using [Print set (DPOF)] (pg. 272). • Print JPEG photographs on a printer connected to a network computer using the WT-4 wireless transmitter (available separately; see the WT-4 user’s manual for details). • Transfer pictures (pg. 256) and print them from a computer using ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 391). Note that this is the only method available for printing RAW (NEF) pictures. Q A TIFF Photographs TIFF photographs can be printed from a computer. Some digital print services may also support TIFF; check with the service before ordering. 262 Direct USB Connection If the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer via the supplied USB cable, selected JPEG pictures can be printed directly from the camera. Take photographs Select photographs for printing using [Print set (DPOF)] (pg. 272) Select [MTP/PTP] in camera [USB] menu and connect camera to printer (pg. 264) Print photographs one at a time (pg. 265) Print multiple photographs (pg. 268) Create index prints (pg. 271) Disconnect USB cable D USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard. Q A Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-6 AC adapter. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection, set [Color space] to [sRGB] (pg. 183). 263 ❚❚ Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable. 1 Select [MTP/PTP]. If the [USB] option in the camera setup menu has been changed from the default setting of [MTP/PTP], display the [USB] menu and select [MTP/PTP] (pg. 257). 2 Turn the camera off. 3 Connect the USB cable. Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. 4 Q 264 Turn the camera on. A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge playback display. q w ❚❚ Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Select a picture. Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures, or press the N button and rotate the main command dial right to zoom in on the current frame (pg. 243). Press K to return to full-frame playback. To view six pictures at a time, press the center of the multi selector. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or press the center of the multi selector again to display the highlighted picture full frame. 2 Display printing options. Press J to display PictBridge printing options. J button Q 265 3 Adjust printing options. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select. Option Q 266 Description Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1 or 3 to choose page size (to print at Page size default page size for current printer, select [Printer default]), then press J to select and return to previous menu. Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1 or 3 to No. of choose number of copies copies (maximum 99), then press J to select and return to previous menu. Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1 or 3 to choose print style from [Printer default] (default for current Border printer), [Print with border] (print photo with white border), or [No border], then press J to select and return to previous menu. Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press 1 or 3 to choose [Printer default] (default Time for current printer), [Print time stamp stamp] (print time and date of recording on photo), or [No time stamp], then press J to select and return to previous menu. Option Description Menu shown at right will be displayed. To exit without cropping picture, highlight [No cropping] and press J. To crop picture, highlight [Crop] and press 2. Cropping If [Crop] is selected, dialog shown at right will be displayed. Rotate main command dial to right to increase size of crop, left to decrease. Choose position of crop using multi selector and press J. 4 Start printing. Select [Start printing] and press J to start printing. To cancel before all copies have been printed, press J. D Q Selecting Photographs for Printing Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) (pg. 66) can not be selected for printing. A See Also See page 420 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing. 267 Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu. Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display (see Step 4 on page 264). G button 2 Choose [Print select] or [Print (DPOF)]. Highlight one of the following options and press 2. • [Print select]: Select pictures for printing. • [Print (DPOF)]: Print an existing print order created with the [Print set (DPOF)] option in the playback menu (pg. 272). The current print order will be displayed in Step 3. To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select [Index print]. See page 271 for more information. Q 268 3 Select pictures. Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card. To display the current picture full screen, press N button. To select the L button current picture for printing, press the L button and press 1. The picture will be marked with a Z icon and the number of prints will be set to 1. Keeping the L button pressed, press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the number of prints is 1). Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected. 4 Display printing options. Press J to display PictBridge printing options. J button Q 269 5 Adjust printing options. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select. Option Description Menu of page size options will be displayed (pg. 266). Press 1 or 3 to choose page size (to print at default Page size page size for current printer, select [Printer default]), then press J to select and return to previous menu. Menu of border options will be displayed (pg. 266). Press 1 or 3 to choose print style from [Printer default] Border (default for current printer), [Print with border] (print photo with white border), or [No border], then press J to select and return to previous menu. Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (pg. 266). Press 1 or 3 to choose [Printer default] (default for Time current printer), [Print time stamp] (print time and date stamp of recording on photo), or [No time stamp], then press J to select and return to previous menu. 6 Start printing. Select [Start printing] and press J to start printing. To cancel before all copies have been printed, press J. Q A Page Size, Border, Time Stamp, and Cropping Choose printer default to print at current printer settings. Only options supported by the current printer can be selected. Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes. A See Also See page 420 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing. 270 ❚❚ Creating Index Prints To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card, select [Index print] in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (pg. 268). Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed. 1 Select [Index print]. Highlight [Index print] in the PictBridge menu (pg. 268) and press 2. The confirmation dialog shown at right will be displayed. 2 Display printing options. Press J to display PictBridge printing options. 3 Adjust printing options. Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 270 (a warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small). 4 Start printing. Q Highlight [Start printing] and press J to start printing. To cancel before printing is complete, press J. 271 ❚❚ Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set The [Print set (DPOF)] option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF. Selecting [Print set (DPOF)] from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1. 1 Choose [Select/set]. Highlight [Select/set] and press 2. 2 Q 272 Select pictures. Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card. To display the current picture in full screen, press N button. To select the L button current picture for printing, press the L button and press 1. The picture will be marked with a Z icon and the number of prints will be set to 1. Keeping the L button pressed, press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the number of prints is 1). Press J when all the desired pictures have been selected. 3 Select imprint options. Highlight the following options and press 2 to toggle the highlighted option on or off (to complete the print order without including this information, proceed to Step 4). • [Data imprint]: Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order. • [Imprint date]: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order. 4 Complete the print order. Highlight [Done] and press J to complete the print order. D Print Set To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select [Print (DPOF)] in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the current order (pg. 268). DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge [Time stamp] option. The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order. Q Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW; pg. 66) can not be selected for printing using this option. Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created. 273 Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG-D2 audio/video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the D3X to a television or VCR for playback or recording. A type A High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from commercial sources) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices. Standard Definition Devices To connect the camera to a standard television: 1 Turn the camera off. Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable. 2 Connect the supplied A/V cable as shown. Connect to camera Video (yellow) Q Connect to video device 3 274 Audio (white) Tune the television to the video channel. 4 Turn the camera on and press K button. During playback, images will be displayed both on the television screen and in the camera monitor. A Video Mode (pg. 348) Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device. Note that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device. A Television Playback Use of an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended playback. When the EH-6 is connected, the camera monitor-off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically. Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen. A Q Audio Output (pg. 254) Set [HDMI/audio-video output] to play back or record voice memos on the video device. A Slide Shows The [Slide show] option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback (pg. 288). 275 High-Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type A HDMI cable (available separately from commercial sources). 1 Turn the camera off. Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable. 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown. Connect to camera Connect to highdefinition device 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel. 4 Turn the camera on and press K button. During playback, images will be displayed on the highdefinition television or monitor screen; the camera monitor will remain off. Q A HDMI (pg. 348) At the default setting of [Auto], the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format for the high-definition device. The HDMI format can be chosen using the [HDMI] option in the setup menu (pg. 348). 276 UMenu Guide This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus. D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ............... pg. 278 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options................. pg. 290 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings........................................................ pg. 302 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup............................... pg. 346 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies..................................................... pg. 363 O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu....................... pg. 376 U 277 D The Playback Menu: Managing Images The playback menu contains the options listed below. For information on using the playback menu, see “Tutorial: Camera Menus” (pg. 26). Option Delete Playback folder Hide image Display mode Copy image(s) Image review After delete Rotate tall Slide show Print set (DPOF) U 278 See page 281 281 281 282 283 287 287 287 288 289 Selecting Multiple Pictures To select multiple pictures for [Delete] (pg. 281), [Hide image] (pg. 281), [Print set (DPOF)] (pg. 272), and direct printing (pg. 268): 1 Highlight a picture. To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the N button. If two memory cards are inserted, the slot can be selected by holding the N button and pressing 1. The menu shown at right will be displayed (pg. 228); highlight the desired slot and press J. 2 Press the center of the multi selector to select the highlighted picture. Selected pictures are marked by an icon. When selecting pictures for printing, press the L button and press 1 or 3 to choose the number of copies. U 279 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect a picture, highlight it and press center of multi selector. 4 Press J to complete the operation. J button A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press J. U 280 Delete Select this option to delete pictures and their associated voice memos. Protected and hidden images will not be deleted. Option Selected Q R All Description Delete selected pictures. Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback (pg. 281). If two memory cards are inserted, a slot selection dialog will be displayed before deletion. Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback. Option NCD3X (default) All Current Description Pictures in all folders created with the D3X will be visible during playback. Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback. Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback. Hide Image Hide or reveal selected pictures. Hidden pictures are visible only in the [Hide image] menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card. Option Select/set Deselect all? Description Hide or reveal selected pictures. Reveal all pictures. D Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image. U 281 Display Mode Choose the information available in the playback photo information display (pg. 229). Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option, then press 2 to select the option for the photo information display. A L appears next to selected items; to deselect, highlight and press 2. To return to the playback menu, highlight [Done] and press J. Option Description Basic photo info Active focus point (or, in single-servo AF, focus point where focus first locked) is shown in red in photo information display. No focus point is displayed if Focus point camera was unable to focus using continuous-servo autofocus or if continuous-servo autofocus was used with auto-area AF. Detailed photo info Highlights for master RGB channel and for individual Highlights red, green, and blue channels are shown in photo information display. Very bright areas blink on and off. RGB Red, green, and blue histograms are displayed in photo histogram information display. Shooting data pages (including camera name, Data metering, exposure, focal length, white balance, and image options) appear in photo information display. U 282 Copy Image(s) Copy photographs from the memory card in slot 1 to the memory card in slot 2. i j 1 Option Description Select image(s) Select photographs from memory card in slot 1. Select destination Select destination folder on memory card in folder slot 2. Copy selected photographs to specified Copy image(s)? destination. Choose [Select image(s)]. Highlight [Select image(s)] and press 2. 2 Choose the source folder. Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press 2. U 283 3 Preselect all or protected images. Highlight one of the following options and press 2: • [Deselect all]: No images will be preselected. Choose this option when selecting individual images by hand. • [Select all images]: Preselect all images in the current folder. Choose this option when selecting all or most images in the current folder to be copied. • [Select protected images]: Preselect all protected images in the current folder. 4 Select images. Images preselected in Step 3 are marked by a L icon. To select additional images or deselect preselected pictures, highlight the image and press the center of the multi selector. Press J to return to the [Copy image(s)] menu when selection is complete. 5 Choose [Select destination folder]. Highlight [Select destination folder] and press 2. U 284 6 Choose a selection method. Highlight one of the following options and press 2. Option Description Enter number of destination folder (pg. 294). Select folder by number Select destination folder from list. Select folder from list 7 Select a destination folder. Enter the desired folder number or highlight the destination folder and press J to select the folder and return to the [Copy image(s)] menu. 8 Select [Copy image(s)?]. Highlight [Copy image(s)?] and press 2. U 285 9 Select [Yes]. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight [Yes] and press J. D Copy Image(s)? Images can only be copied if there is sufficient space on the destination memory card. Hidden pictures can not be copied. If the destination folder contains a file with the same name as a file selected for copying, a warning will be displayed. To replace the existing file, highlight [Replace existing image] or [Replace all] and press J. Hidden or protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced. Select [Skip] to cancel replacement and proceed to copy remaining files. Select [Cancel] to cancel before copying is complete. Copies have the same protect marking as the original; print marking is not copied. Voice memos will be copied with their associated images. U 286 Image Review Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting. Option Description Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after On shooting. Off (default) Pictures can only be displayed by pressing K button. After Delete Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted. Option Show next S (default) Show T previous Description Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame, previous picture will be displayed. Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame, following picture will be displayed. If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded, following picture will be displayed as Continue as described for [Show next]. If user was scrolling U before through pictures in reverse order, previous picture will be displayed as described for [Show previous]. Rotate Tall Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image review (pg. 228). Option On Off (default) Description “Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken with [Off ] selected for [Auto image rotation] (pg. 351) will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation. “Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation. U 287 Slide Show Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder (pg. 281). Hidden images (pg. 281) are not displayed. Option Description Start Start slide show. Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed. Display menu of voice memo playback options Audio playback (pg. 289). To start the slide show, highlight [Start] and press J. The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress: To Press Description Skip back/skip Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip ahead to next frame. View additional Change photo info displayed (pg. 229). photo info Pause slide show (see following page). Voice Pause slide show J memo playback may continue after J button has been pressed. Exit to playback G End slide show and return to playback menu. menu Exit to playback End slide show and exit to full-frame (pg. 226) K mode or thumbnail playback (pg. 241). Exit to shooting Press shutter-release button halfway to return mode to shooting mode. U 288 A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or when the J button is pressed to pause playback. Select [Restart] to restart (if the slide was paused, the show will resume from the next slide) or [Exit] to return to the playback menu. ❚❚ Audio Playback Choose [On] to play voice memos during slide shows. The following options will be displayed: Option Description Playback ends when next frame is displayed, even if Frame interval entire memo has not been played. Next frame is not displayed until entire memo has been Length of played, even if frame interval is shorter than voice voice memo memo. Choose [Off ] (the default option) to disable voice memo playback during slide shows. Print Set (DPOF) Choose [Select/set] to select pictures for printing on a DPOFcompatible device (pg. 272). Choose [Deselect all?] to remove all pictures from the current print order. U 289 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options The shooting menu contains the options listed below. For information on using the shooting menu, see “Tutorial: Camera Menus” (pg. 26). Option Shooting menu bank Reset shooting menu Active folder File naming Slot 2 Image quality Image size Image area JPEG compression NEF (RAW) recording White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Color space Active D-Lighting Vignette control Long exp. NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view Multiple exposure Interval timer shooting U 290 See page 291 293 293 296 72 66 70 60 68 69 140 162 170 183 181 299 300 300 104 90 206 211 Shooting Menu Bank Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the exceptions of [Interval timer shooting], [Multiple exposure], and modifications to Picture Controls (quick adjust and other manual adjustments), changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected. Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu. The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C, and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the [Rename] option as described below. A Shooting Menu Bank The top control panel and shooting information displays show the current shooting menu bank. SHOOT CUSTOM ❚❚ Renaming Shooting Menu Banks Selecting [Rename] in the [Shooting menu bank] menu displays the list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1. 1 Select a bank. U Highlight the desired bank and press 2. 291 2 Enter a name. Keyboard area To move the cursor in the name area, press the N button and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the multi selector Name area to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the O button. To return to the shooting menu without changing the bank name, press the G button. Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any characters after the twentieth will be deleted. 3 Save changes and exit. After editing the name, press J to save changes and exit. J button The [Shooting menu bank] menu will be displayed. U 292 Reset Shooting Menu Choose whether to restore default settings for the current shooting menu bank. See page 423 for a list of default settings. With the exceptions of image quality, image size, white balance, and ISO sensitivity, shooting menu settings are not reset when a two-button reset (pg. 204) is performed. Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current shooting menu bank. No (default) Exit without changing shooting menu settings. Active Folder Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored. ❚❚ New Folder Number 1 Select [New folder number]. Highlight [New folder number] and press 2. U 293 2 Choose a folder number. Press the 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number: • W: Folder is empty. • X: Folder is partially full. • Y: Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder. 3 Save changes and exit. Press J to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu (to exit without changing the active folder, press the G button). If a folder with the specified number does not already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full. U 294 ❚❚ Select Folder 1 Choose [Select folder]. Highlight [Select folder] and press 2. 2 Highlight a folder. Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder. 3 Select the highlighted folder. Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu (to exit without changing the active folder, press the G button). Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder. D Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images. A Number of Folders Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of folders. U 295 File Naming Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space, “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension (e.g., “DSC_ 0001.JPG”). The [File naming] option is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For information on editing file names, see steps 2 and 3 of “Renaming Shooting Menu Banks” (pg. 292). Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long. A Extensions The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF” for TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, and “.NDF” for dust off reference data. Slot 2 Choose the role played by the secondary card slot when two memory cards are inserted in the camera (pg. 72). Image Quality Choose image quality (pg. 66). U 296 Image Size Choose the size at which pictures are recorded (pg. 70). Image Area Although the D3X can record photographs with the same diagonal picture angle as a 35mm format camera using a 3 : 2 aspect ratio, it can also be used to record photographs with the smaller DX picture angle or the 5 : 4 aspect ratio (pg. 60). JPEG Compression Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a fixed size or to vary file size for improved image quality (pg. 68). NEF (RAW) Recording Choose compression and bit-depth options for NEF (RAW) images (pg. 69). White Balance Adjust white balance settings (pg. 140). U 297 Set Picture Control Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings (pg. 162). Manage Picture Control Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations, or copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card (pg. 170). Color Space Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces (pg. 183). Active D-Lighting This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows (pg. 181). The default setting is [Off ]. U 298 Vignette Control “Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph. [Vignette control] reduces vignetting for type G and D lenses (DX and PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from [High], [Normal] (the default setting), [Low], and [Off]. A Vignette Control Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF and JPEG images may exhibit unevenness or variations in peripheral brightness, while custom Picture Controls and Nikon Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor. Vignette control does not apply to multiple exposures (pg. 206), DX-format images (pg. 60), or images created with [Image overlay] (pg. 371). The effects of vignette control can not be previewed in live view (pg. 90). U 299 Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction) Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds. Option Description Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8s are processed to reduce noise. While photographs are being processed, “l m” will blink in the shutter speed/aperture displays for a period of time On approximately equal to the current shutter speed. In continuous release mode, frame rates will slow and the capacity of the memory buffer will drop. Photographs can not be taken until processing is complete and “l m” has cleared from the displays. Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete. Off (default) Long exposure noise reduction off. SHOOT CUSTOM High ISO NR Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.” U 300 Option Description S High Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of Normal ISO 500 and higher. While photographs are being T (default) processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will drop. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from U Low [High], [Normal], and [Low]. Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3 and higher. The amount of noise reduction is less Off than the amount performed when [Low] is selected for [High ISO NR]. ISO Sensitivity Settings Adjust ISO sensitivity and ISO sensitivity auto control settings (pp. 104, 106). Live View Choose a live view mode and the release mode that will be used when the camera is in live view mode (pg. 91). Multiple Exposure Create a single photograph from two to ten exposures (pg. 206). Interval Timer Shooting Take photographs automatically at pre-selected intervals. Use for time-lapse movies of such subjects as flowers opening or butterflies emerging from cocoons (pg. 211). U 301 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences. In addition to Custom Settings B ([Custom setting bank]) and A ([Reset custom settings]), settings in the Custom Settings menu are divided into the six groups shown at right. Main menu U 302 B: Custom setting bank (pg. 304) A: Reset custom settings (pg. 304) Custom Setting groups The following Custom Settings are available: B A a a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 b b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 c c1 c2 c3 c4 Custom Setting Custom setting bank Reset custom settings Autofocus AF-C priority selection AF-S priority selection Dynamic AF area Focus tracking with lock-on AF activation Focus point illumination Focus point wrap-around AF point selection B button Vertical B button Metering/exposure ISO sensitivity step value EV steps for exposure cntrl. EV steps for exposure comp. Easy exposure compensation Center-weighted area Fine tune optimal exposure Timers/AE lock Shutter-release button AE-L Auto meter-off delay Self-timer delay Monitor off delay Page 304 304 305 306 307 309 309 310 311 311 312 313 314 314 314 315 316 316 318 318 319 319 d d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 e e1 e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 f f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 Custom Setting Shooting/display Beep Shooting speed Max. continuous release File number sequence Control panel/viewfinder Shooting info display LCD illumination Exposure delay mode Bracketing/flash Flash sync speed Flash shutter speed Modeling flash Auto bracketing set Auto bracketing (Mode M) Bracketing order Controls Multi selector center button Multi selector Photo info/playback Assign FUNC. button Assign preview button Assign AE-L/AF-L button Customize command dials Release button to use dial No memory card? Reverse indicators Page 320 321 321 322 323 324 325 325 326 327 327 328 329 330 331 332 332 333 339 340 341 343 344 345 U 303 B: Custom Setting Bank Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected. Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu. The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C, and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the [Rename] option as described on page 291. A Custom Settings Bank The bank letter appears in the top control panel and shooting information displays. If settings in the current bank have been modified from default values, an asterisk will be displayed adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu. SHOOT CUSTOM A: Reset Custom Settings Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings bank. See page 424 for a list of default settings. Custom Settings are not reset when a two-button reset is performed. U 304 Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings bank. No (default) Exit without changing Custom Settings. a: Autofocus a1: AF-C Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority) in continuous-servo AF. To select continuous-servo AF, rotate the focus mode selector to C. Option Release G (default) Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed. Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in Release + E focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for focus improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast. Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator F Focus (I) is displayed. Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when the infocus indicator (I) is displayed. The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released. U 305 a2: AF-S Priority Selection This option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutterrelease button is pressed (release priority) in single-servo AF. To select single-servo AF, rotate the focus mode selector to S. Option G Release F Focus (default) Focus mode selector Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed. Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed. Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus lock continues until the shutter is released. U 306 a3: Dynamic AF Area If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic-area AF (I; pg. 76) is selected in continuous-servo AF (focus mode C; pg. 74), the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points. Choose the number of points from 9, 21, and 51 based on subject movement. Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation. Option c 9 points (default) d 21 points e 51 points Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding eight focus points. Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track). If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 20 focus points. Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game). If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the camera will focus based on information from the surrounding 50 focus points. Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds). U 307 Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the camera will use 3D-tracking to track the subject and select a new focus point as required. Use to 51 points f (3D-tracking) quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point. A 3D-Tracking When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3Dtracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame. A See Also For information on using the Fn button and command dials to select the number of focus points for dynamic-area AF, see Custom Setting f4 ([Assign FUNC. button]) > [FUNC. button+dials] > [Dynamic AF area] (pg. 336). U 308 a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject. Option Description C Long When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the Normal camera waits for the specified period (long, normal, or D (default) short) before adjusting the distance to the subject. This prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is E Short briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame. The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance Off to the subject changes. Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession. a5: AF Activation This option controls whether both the shutter-release button and the B button can be used to initiate autofocus, or whether autofocus is only initiated when the B button is pressed. Option Shutter/ AF-ON (default) B only Description Autofocus can be performed with the B button or by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. Autofocus can only be performed using the B button. U 309 a6: Focus Point Illumination The options in this menu control whether or not the focus points are illuminated. Option Description Manual Choose [On] (the default setting) to display the active focus mode focus point in manual focus mode. Choose [On] (the default setting) to display the active Continuous focus point in CH (continuous high-speed) and CL mode (continuous low-speed) modes. Choose the brightness of the focus point display in the Focus point viewfinder from [Extra high], [High], [Normal] (the default brightness setting), and [Low]. U 310 a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the viewfinder to another. Option Description Focus-point selection “wraps around” from top to bottom, q bottom to top, right to left, and left w to right, so that, for example, Wrap pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted (q) selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display (w). The focus-area display is bounded by the outermost focus No wrap points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at (default) the right edge of the display is selected has no effect. a8: AF Point Selection Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection. Option B 51 points (default) Description Choose from the 51 focus points shown at right. Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right. Use for quick A 11 points focus-point selection. U 311 a9: AF-ON Button Choose the function performed when the B button is pressed. Option B A (default) Description Pressing the B button initiates autofocus. Focus and exposure lock while the B button is pressed. C AE lock only Exposure locks while the B button is pressed. Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and AE lock remains locked until the button is pressed a second D (Reset on time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters release) turn off. Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and AE lock remains locked until the button is pressed a second E (Hold) time or the exposure meters turn off. F AF lock only Focus locks while the B button is pressed. B AE/AF lock U 312 a10: Vertical AF-ON Button Choose the function assigned to the B button for vertical shooting. Option Description Both B buttons perform the function selected G Same as AF-ON for Custom Setting a9. AF-ON Pressing the vertical B button initiates A (default) autofocus. Focus and exposure lock while the vertical B B AE/AF lock button is pressed. Exposure locks while the vertical B button is C AE lock only pressed. Exposure locks when the vertical B button is AE lock (Reset pressed, and remains locked until the button is D pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or on release) the exposure meters turn off. Exposure locks when the vertical B button is pressed, and remains locked until the button is E AE lock (Hold) pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off. Focus locks while the vertical B button is F AF lock only pressed. U 313 b: Metering/Exposure b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value This option determines whether adjustments to sensitivity are made in increments equivalent to 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. Option 1/3 step H (default) I 1/2 step J 1 step b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl. This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. Option Description Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments 1/3 step H equivalent to 1/3 EV. The bracketing increment can be (default) selected from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV. Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments I 1/2 step equivalent to 1/2 EV. The bracketing increment can be selected from 1/2 and 1 EV. Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments J 1 step equivalent to 1 EV. The bracketing increment is set to 1 EV. b3: EV Steps for Exposure Comp. This option determines whether adjustments Option to exposure compensation are made in 1/3 step H (default) increments equivalent to 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. U 314 I 1/2 step J 1 step b4: Easy Exposure Compensation This option controls whether the E button is needed to set exposure compensation (pg. 128). If [On (Auto reset)] or [On] is selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to ±0. Option K On (Auto reset) On Off (default) Description Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials (see note below). The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off (exposure compensation settings selected using the E button are not reset). As above, except that the exposure compensation value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off. Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the main command dial. A Change Main/Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when [On (Auto reset)] or [On] is selected for Custom Setting b4 ([Easy exposure compensation]) depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f7 ([Customize command dials]) > [Change main/sub] (pg. 341). Exposure mode e f g h Customize command dials > Change main/sub Off (default) On Sub-command dial Sub-command dial Sub-command dial Main command dial Main command dial Sub-command dial N/A U 315 b5: Center-Weighted Area When calculating exposure, centerweighted metering assigns the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the frame. The diameter (φ ) of this circle can be set to 8, 12, 15, or 20 mm or to the average of the entire frame. L M N O P Option φ 8 mm φ 12 mm (default) φ 15 mm φ 20 mm Average Note that unless [Average] is selected, the diameter is fixed at 12 mm when a non-CPU lens is used, regardless of the setting selected for [Non-CPU lens data] in the setup menu (pg. 218). When [Average] is selected, the average of the entire frame will be used for both CPU and non-CPU lenses. b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the camera. Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV. 1 Select Custom Setting b6. Highlight Custom Setting b6 ([Fine tune optimal exposure]) and press 2. 2 U 316 Select [Yes]. The message shown at right will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press 2 to proceed, or select [No] to exit without altering exposure. 3 Select a metering method. Highlight [Matrix metering], [Center-weighted], or [Spot metering] and press 2. 4 Choose an exposure value. Press 1 or 3 to choose an exposure value from +1 to –1 EV. Press J to save changes and exit. D Fine-Tuning Exposure Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu. Exposure compensation (pg. 128) is preferred in most situations. U 317 c: Timers/AE Lock c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L At the default setting of [Off], exposure only locks when the AE-L/ AF-L button is pressed. If [On] is selected, exposure will also lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. c2: Auto Meter-off Delay This option controls how long the camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are performed. Choose from 4 s, 6 s, 8 s, 16 s, 30 s, 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, or until the camera is turned off ([No limit]). The shutter-speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and viewfinder turn off automatically when the exposure meters turn off. Q R S T U V W X Y Z Option 4s 6 s (default) 8s 16 s 30 s 1 min. 5 min. 10 min. 30 min. No limit Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life. U 318 c3: Self-Timer Delay This option controls the length of the shutter release delay in self-timer mode. Choose from 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, and 20 s. Option a 2s b 5s c 10 s (default) d 20 s c4: Monitor off Delay This option controls how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed. Choose from 10 s, 20 s, 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes. Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life. Regardless of the setting chosen, the monitor remains on if no operations are performed for about ten minutes when the camera is powered by an optional EH-6 AC adapter. Option e 10 s f 20 s (default) g 1 min. h 5 min. i 10 min. U 319 d: Shooting/Display d1: Beep Choose [High] or [Low] to sound a beep when the self-timer is used or the camera focuses in single-servo autofocus (note that a beep will not sound if [Release] is selected for Custom Setting a2 ([AF-S priority selection], pg. 306). Option Description Choose the pitch of the beep y High from [High] and [Low]. A c icon is displayed in the top control panel and shooting z Low information displays. Off (default) Turn the beep speaker off. SHOOT CUSTOM U 320 d2: Shooting Speed Choose the maximum frame advance rate for CH (continuous highspeed) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes. Note that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds, or when using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses. Option Continuous high-speed Continuous low-speed Description In CH (continuous high-speed) mode, the frame advance rate for DX format (pg. 61) can be selected from 5 (the default setting), 6, and 7 frames per second (fps). Regardless of the setting chosen, the maximum frame rate for other formats is fixed at 5 fps. Choose the frame advance rate for CL (continuous lowspeed) mode from values between 1 and 5 fps. The default setting is 3 fps. d3: Max. Continuous Release The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 130. A The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3, shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills. See page 427 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer. U 321 d4: File Number Sequence When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Option J D U 322 Description When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current On folder, whichever is higher. If a photograph is taken (default) when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001. File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a Off new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs. Same as for [On], except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the Reset largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to 0001. File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken. Choose [Reset] for Custom Setting d4 ([File number sequence]) and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card. d5: Control Panel/Viewfinder Choose the information displayed in the viewfinder and rear control panel. Option Description Choose from [ISO sensitivity] (y; the default setting) and Rear control [Exposures remaining] (g). If [Exposures remaining] is panel selected, ISO sensitivity will only be displayed while the ISO button is pressed. Choose from [Frame count] (h; the default setting) and Viewfinder [Exposures remaining] (g). Note that regardless of the display option selected, memory buffer capacity will be shown while the shutter-release button is pressed. U 323 d6: Shooting Info Display At the default setting of [Auto] (AUTO), the color of the lettering in the information display (pg. 14) will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background. To always use the same color lettering, select [Manual] and choose [Dark on light] (B; black lettering) or [Light on dark] (W; white lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color. Dark on light U 324 Light on dark d7: LCD Illumination At the default setting of [Off ], the control panel backlights (LCD illuminators) will only light while the power switch is rotated toward D. If [On] is selected, the control panels will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active (pg. 50). Select [Off ] for increased battery life. d8: Exposure Delay Mode At the default setting of [Off ], shutter is released when the shutterrelease button is pressed. When shooting with [Tripod] selected in live view mode (pg. 94) or in situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, [On] can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter-release button is pressed and the mirror is raised. U 325 e: Bracketing/Flash e1: Flash Sync Speed This option controls flash sync speed. Option Description Auto FP high-speed sync is used with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are used, shutter speed is set to 1/250 s. When the 1/250 s (Auto FP) camera shows a shutter speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode e or g, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/250 s. 1/250 s (default) Flash sync speed set to 1/250 s. 1/200 s Flash sync speed set to 1/200 s. 1/160 s Flash sync speed set to 1/160 s. 1/125 s Flash sync speed set to 1/125 s. 1/100 s Flash sync speed set to 1/100 s. 1/80 s Flash sync speed set to 1/80 s. 1/60 s Flash sync speed set to 1/60 s. A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or bulb). An X (flash sync indicator) will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. U 326 e2: Flash Shutter Speed This option determines the slowest shutter speed available when using front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction in programmed auto or aperture-priority auto exposure modes (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s ([1/60 s], the default setting) to 30 s ([30 s]). e3: Modeling Flash If [On] (the default setting) is selected when the camera is being used with an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; pg. 186), the flash unit mounted on the camera and any CLS-compatible remote flash units will emit a modeling flash when the camera depth-of-field preview button is pressed (pg. 113). No modeling flash is emitted if [Off ] is selected. U 327 e4: Auto Bracketing Set Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing (pg. 130) is in effect. Choose [AE & flash] (j; the default setting) to perform both exposure and flash-level bracketing, [AE only] (k) to bracket only exposure, [Flash only] (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, or [WB bracketing] (m) to perform white-balance bracketing (pg. 135). Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG. U 328 e5: Auto Bracketing (Mode M) This option determines which settings are affected when [AE & flash] or [AE only] is selected for Custom Setting e4 in manual exposure mode. Option F G H I Description Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e4 set Flash/speed to [AE only]) or shutter speed and flash level (default) (Custom Setting e4 set to [AE & flash]). Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom Flash/speed/ Setting e4 set to [AE only]) or shutter speed, aperture aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e4 set to [AE & flash]). Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e4 set to Flash/ [AE only]) or aperture and flash level (Custom aperture Setting e4 set to [AE & flash]). Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e4 Flash only set to [AE & flash]). Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control. If a setting other than [Flash only] is selected and a flash is not used, ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot, regardless of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control (pg. 106). U 329 e6: Bracketing Order At the default setting of [MTR]>[under]>[over] (H), bracketing is performed in the order described on pages 132 and 136. If [Under]>[MTR]>[over] (I) is selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value. U 330 f: Controls f1: Multi Selector Center Button This option determines what operations can be performed by pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting, live view, and playback modes. ❚❚ Shooting Mode Selecting [Shooting mode] displays the following options: J Option Select center focus point (default) Not used Description Pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting mode selects the center focus point. Pressing the center of the multi selector has no effect when the camera is in shooting mode. ❚❚ Playback Mode Selecting [Playback mode] displays the following options: n o p Option Description Thumbnail Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between on/off full-frame and thumbnail playback. (default) In both full-frame and thumbnail playback, a histogram View is displayed while the center of the multi selector is histograms pressed. Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback and playback zoom. Zoom on/ Choose the initial zoom setting from [Low off magnification], [Medium magnification], and [High magnification]. The zoom display will center on the active focus point. U 331 ❚❚ Live View Selecting [Live view] displays the following options: J Option Select center focus point (default) p Zoom on/off Not used Description Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view selects the center focus point. Press the center of the multi selector to toggle zoom on and off. Choose the initial zoom setting from [Low magnification], [Medium magnification], and [High magnification]. The zoom display will center on the active focus point. Pressing the center of the multi selector has no effect in live view. f2: Multi Selector If [Reset meter-off delay] is selected, operating the multi selector when the exposure meters are off (pg. 50) will activate the exposure meters. If [Do nothing] (the default option) is selected, the exposure meters will not be activated when the multi selector is pressed. f3: Photo Info/Playback At the default setting of [Info13/Playback42], pressing 1 or 3 in full-frame playback changes the photo information displayed, while pressing 4 or 2 displays additional images. To reverse the role of the multi selector buttons so that pressing 1 or 3 displays additional images and pressing 4 or 2 changes the photo information displayed, select [Info42/Playback13]. U 332 f4: Assign FUNC. Button Choose the role played by the Fn button, either by itself ([FUNC. button press]) or when used in combination with the command dials ([FUNC. button+dials]). ❚❚ FUNC. Button Press Selecting [FUNC. button press] for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options: Option Description Press the Fn button to preview depth of field q Preview * (pg. 113). Press the Fn button to lock flash value (SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only, r FV lock * pg. 198). Press again to cancel FV lock. Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is B AE/AF lock pressed. C AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed. Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and AE lock remains locked until the button is pressed a second D (Reset on time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters * release) turn off. Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and AE lock remains locked until the button is pressed a second E (Hold) * time or the exposure meters turn off. F AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed. The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn s Flash off button is pressed. U 333 Option Bracketing t burst Matrix L metering Center- M weighted Spot N metering Virtual u horizon * D Playback * Access top O item in My Menu * None (default) Description If the Fn button is pressed while exposure or flash bracketing is active in single frame release mode, all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken at 5 fps while the shutter-release button is pressed. If white balance bracketing is active or continuous release mode (mode CH or CL) is selected, the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutterrelease button is held down. Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed. Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed. Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed. The electronic analog exposure displays act as a tilt meter (pg. 335). The Fn button performs the same function as the K button. Choose when using a long lens or in other situations in which it is difficult to operate the K button with your left hand. Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item. No operation is performed when the Fn button is pressed. * This option can not be used in combination with [FUNC. button+dials] (pg. 336). Selecting this options displays a message and sets [FUNC. button+dials] to [None]. If another option is selected for [FUNC. button+dials] while this setting is active, [FUNC. button press] will be set to [None]. U 334 Note that none of these options can be combined with [FUNC. button+dials] > [Dynamic AF area]; see page 336. A Virtual Horizon When [Virtual horizon] is selected for [FUNC. button press], the electronic analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and top control panel act as a horizontal level when the Fn button is pressed. Camera tilted right Camera level Camera tilted left Control panel Viewfinder Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back. U 335 ❚❚ FUNC. Button+Dials Selecting [FUNC. button+dials] for Custom Setting f4 displays the following options: Option Choose image area i (FX/DX/5:4) (default) U 336 Description The Fn button and main command dial can be used to select the image area from FX, DX, and 5 : 4 (pg. 60). The image area can not be changed while shooting a multiple exposure (pg. 206). The Fn button and main command dial can be used Choose to switch between FX and DX image areas. The m image area image area can not be changed while shooting a (FX/DX) multiple exposure. If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated, changes to shutter speed (exposure 1 step spd/ modes f and h) and aperture (exposure modes g v aperture and h) are made in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b2 ([EV steps for exposure cntrl.], pg. 314). Choose non- Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to choose a lens number specified using the [Non-CPU w CPU lens number lens data] option (pg. 218). Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials Focus pointfor vertical shooting to choose a focus point x selection (pg. 337). If this option is selected, the shooting menu bank Shooting n menu bank can be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating a command dial. When I (dynamic-area AF) is selected in focus mode C (continuous-servo autofocus), the number of focus points (pg. 307) can be selected by pressing Dynamic AF the Fn button and rotating a command dial. The z area focus points used for dynamic-area AF are displayed in the viewfinder while the Fn button is pressed; if [51 points (3D-tracking)] is selected, “3D” will be displayed in the viewfinder. No operation is performed when the command None dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed. Portrait (Tall-Orientation) Photographs To use the command dials to select the focus point when framing shots in portrait (“tall”) orientation: 1 Choose [Focus point-selection]. Select [Focus point-selection] for Custom Setting f4 ([Assign FUNC. button]) > [FUNC. button+dials]. 2 Unlock the shutter-release Vertical shutter-release button lock button for vertical shooting. U 337 3 Select the focus point. With the camera in portrait (“tall”) orientation, select a focus point by pressing the Fn button and rotating the command dials for vertical shooting. Use the main command dial to move the focus area selection left or right, the sub-command dial to move it up or down. Main command dial for vertical shooting + Fn button Main command dial for vertical shooting Sub-command dial for vertical shooting + Fn button U 338 Sub-command dial for vertical shooting f5: Assign Preview Button Choose the role played by the depth-of-field preview button, either by itself ([Preview button press]) or when used in combination with the command dials ([Preview + command dials]). The options available are the same as for [FUNC. button press] (pg. 333) and [FUNC. button+dials] (pg. 336), except that the default option for [Preview button press] is [Preview] and that [Preview + command dials] lacks a [Focus point-selection] option (the default setting for [Preview + command dials] is [None]). U 339 f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button, either by itself ([AE-L/AF-L button press]) or when used in combination with the command dials ([AE-L/AF-L+command dials]). The options available for [AE-L/AF-L button press] are the same as for [FUNC. button press] (pg. 333), except that [AE-L/AF-L button press] defaults to [AE/AF lock] and has an additional B option (if this option is selected, pressing the AE-L/AF-L button has the same effect as pressing the B button to initiate autofocus). The options available for [AE-L/AF-L+command dials] are the same as for [FUNC. button+dials] (pg. 336), except that [AE-L/AF-L +command dials] defaults to [None] and lacks [1 step spd/aperture] and [Focus point-selection] options. U 340 f7: Customize Command Dials This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command dials. Option Reverse rotation Change main/sub Description Controls the direction of the command dials. Choose [No] (the default option) for normal command dial operation, or [Yes] to reverse the rotation of the command dials. This setting also applies to the command dials for vertical shooting. At the default setting of [Off ], the main command dial controls shutter speed and the sub-command dial controls aperture. If [On] is selected, the main command dial will control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If [On (Mode A)] is selected, the main command dial will be used to set aperture in exposure mode g only. This setting also applies to the command dials for vertical shooting. U 341 Option Description At the default setting of [Sub-command dial], aperture can only be adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main command dial if [On] is selected for [Change main/ sub]). If [Aperture ring] is selected, aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture Aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for setting type G lenses is still set using the sub-command dial). If [Aperture ring] is selected and a CPU lens with an aperture ring is attached when the mode dial is rotated to a, live view will not start and the shutter release will be disabled. Note that regardless of the setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached. At the default setting of [Off ], the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback, highlight thumbnails, and navigate menus. If [On] is selected, the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback, move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback, and move the menu Menus highlight bar up or down. The sub-command dial is used to and display additional photo information in full-frame playback playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback. While menus are displayed, rotating the subcommand dial right displays the sub-menu for the selected option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2, the center of the multi selector, or J. D Live View When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring in live view, select [Sub-command dial] for [Aperture setting]. U 342 f8: Release Button to Use Dial This option allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. At the default setting of [No], the button must be pressed while the command dial is rotated. If [Yes] is selected, the setting can be changed by rotating the command dial after the button is released. Setting ends when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or any of the I, E, t, M, ISO, QUAL, or WB button is pressed. Except when [No limit] is selected for Custom Setting c2 [Auto meter-off delay], setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off. U 343 f9: No Memory Card? At the default setting of [Enable release], the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If [Release locked] is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option. U 344 f10: Reverse Indicators At the default setting of (V), the exposure indicators in the top control panel and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative (W) to display values on the right. Select negative values on the left and positive values on the right. U 345 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup The setup menu contains the options listed below. For information on using the setup menu, see “Tutorial: Camera Menus” (pg. 26). U 346 Option Format memory card LCD brightness Lock mirror up for cleaning 1 Video mode HDMI World time Language Image comment Auto image rotation Voice memo Voice memo overwrite Voice memo button Audio output USB Dust off ref photo Battery info Wireless transmitter 2 Image authentication Copyright information Save/load settings GPS Virtual horizon Non-CPU lens data AF fine tune Firmware version See page 347 347 400 348 348 349 349 350 351 248 249 249 254 352 353 355 261 356 357 358 221 360 218 361 362 1 Not available when battery is low. 2 Only available when optional WT-4 wireless transmitter is connected and [MTP/PTP] selected for [USB] (pg. 352). Format Memory Card Format the card in the selected slot. Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card. Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required. D During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting. A Two-Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the Q (O and I) buttons for more than two seconds (pg. 45). LCD Brightness Press 1 or 3 to choose from seven settings for monitor brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness. A See Also For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see page 99. Lock Mirror up for Cleaning Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the low-pass filter that protects the camera image sensor (pg. 400). U 347 Video Mode When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the A/V out connector, be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL). HDMI The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector, allowing pictures to be played back on high-definition televisions or monitors using a type A cable (available separately from commercial suppliers). Before connecting the camera to high-definition device, choose the HDMI format from the options below. Option v Auto (default) J K L M 480p (progressive) 576p (progressive) 720p (progressive) 1080i (interlaced) Description The camera automatically selects the appropriate format. 640 × 480 (progressive) format 720 × 576 (progressive) format 1,280 × 720 (progressive) format 1,920 × 1,080 (interlaced) format The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected. U 348 World Time Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off. Option Description Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically Time zone set to the time in the new time zone. Date and time Set the camera clock (pg. 40). Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are Date format displayed. Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock Daylight will automatically be advanced or set back one hour. saving time The default setting is [Off ]. Language Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The following options are available. German English Spanish Finnish French Italian Dutch Polish Portuguese Russian Swedish Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Japanese Korean U 349 Image Comment Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed in ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 391). The comment is also visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information display. • [Done]: Save changes and return to the setup menu. • [Input comment]: Input a comment as described on page 292. Comments can be up to 36 characters long. • [Attach comment]: Select this option to attach the comment to all subsequent photographs. [Attach comment] can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. U 350 Auto Image Rotation Photographs taken while [On] (the default option) is selected contain information on camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback (pg. 287) or when viewed in ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 391). The following orientations are recorded: Landscape (wide) orientation Camera rotated 90° clockwise Camera rotated 90° counter-clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when [Off ] is selected. Choose this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down. A Rotate Tall To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback, select [On] for the [Rotate tall] option in the playback menu (pg. 287). Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated automatically during image review (pg. 228). Voice Memo The voice memo menu contains options for recording voice memos during shooting. See “Voice Memos: Recording Voice Memos” (pg. 248). U 351 Voice Memo Overwrite This option determines whether the voice memo for the last photograph recorded can be overwritten when the camera is in shooting mode. See “Voice Memos: Recording Voice Memos” (pg. 249). Voice Memo Button This option controls the operation of the H button. See “Voice Memos: Recording Voice Memos” (pg. 249). Audio Output Choose output options for voice memo playback. See “Voice Memos: Playing Voice Memos” (pg. 254). USB Choose a USB option for connection to a computer or PictBridge printer. Choose [MTP/PTP] (the default setting) when connecting to a PictBridge printer or an optional WT-4 wireless transmitter or when using Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; see page 391). See page 257 for information on selecting a USB option for use with Nikon Transfer (supplied). U 352 Dust off Ref Photo Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the software manual). [Dust off ref photo] is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera. A non-DX lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in. 1 Select [Start]. Highlight [Start] and press J. The message shown at right will be displayed and “rEF” will appear in the viewfinder and top control panel. To exit without acquiring image dust off data, press G. 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder. With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway. In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually. U 353 3 Acquire dust off reference data. Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed. If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose another reference object and repeat the process from step 1. D Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera; histograms and highlights are not displayed. U 354 Battery Info View information on the battery currently inserted in the camera. Item Bat. meter Description The current battery level expressed as a percentage. The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged. Note Pic. meter that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset white balance. • [j]: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is required to ensure that battery level can be measured Calibration accurately; recalibrate battery before charging (pg. 437). • [—]: Calibration not required. A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced. Note that batteries charged at temperatures Charging life under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life; the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher. U 355 Wireless Transmitter This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless network, using an optional WT-4 wireless transmitter. See “Connections: Wireless and Ethernet Networks” (pg. 261). Image Authentication Choose whether to embed image authentication information in new photographs as they are taken, allowing alterations to be detected using Nikon’s optional Image Authentication software. Image authentication information can not be embedded in existing photographs. Photographs taken with image authentication on are marked with a p icon on the file information and overview data pages of the photo information display (pp. 230, 240). Option Description Image authentication information embedded in new s On photographs as they are taken. Off Image authentication information not embedded in (default) new photographs. D Camera Control Pro 2 Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF (RGB) photographs recorded directly to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately). A Copies Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created using the options in the retouch menu (pg. 363). U 356 Copyright Information Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information is visible on the fourth shooting data page in the photo information display (pg. 237) and can be viewed using ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 391). • [Done]: Save changes and return to the setup menu. • [Artist]: Enter a photographer name as described on page 292. Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long. • [Copyright]: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 292. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long. • [Attach copyright information]: Select this option to attach copyright information to all subsequent photographs. [Attach copyright information] can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. D Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names, make sure that [Attach copyright information] is not selected and that the [Artist] and [Copyright] fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the [Copyright information] option. U 357 Save/Load Settings Select [Save settings] to save the following settings to the memory card in slot 1 (if the memory card is full, an error will be displayed; pg 417). Menu Playback Shooting (all banks) Option Display mode Image review After delete Rotate tall Shooting menu bank File naming Slot 2 Image quality Image size Image area JPEG compression NEF (RAW) recording White balance (with fine tuning and presets d-0–d-4) Set Picture Control Color space Active D-Lighting Vignette control Long exp. NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view Custom settings All Custom Settings except [Reset custom settings] (all banks) U 358 Menu Option Video mode HDMI World time (excepting date and time) Language Image comment Auto image rotation Voice memo Setup Voice memo overwrite Voice memo button Audio output USB Image authentication Copyright information GPS Non-CPU lens data All My Menu items My Menu/ All recent settings Recent Settings Choose tab Settings saved using the D3X can be restored by selecting [Load settings]. Note that [Save/load settings] is only available when a memory card is inserted in slot 1, and that the [Load settings] option is only available if the card in slot 1 contains saved settings (the memory card in slot 2 can not be used to save or load settings). A Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP3. The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed. U 359 GPS Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit (pg. 221). Virtual Horizon Display a virtual horizon based on information from the camera orientation sensor. D Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back. A See Also For information on using the electronic analog exposure displays as a tilt meter, see Custom Setting f4 ([Assign FUNC. button] > [FUNC. button press]; pg. 334). For information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view, see page 99. Non-CPU Lens Data By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture) for up to nine non-CPU lenses, the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions (pg. 218). U 360 AF Fine Tune Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. AF tuning is not recommended in most situations; use only when required. Option Description AF fine • [On]: Turn AF tuning on. tune • [Off] (default): Turn AF tuning off. (On/Off) Tune AF for the current lens (CPU Move focal lenses only). Press 1 or 3 to point away Saved choose a value between +20 and from camera. value –20. Values for up to 20 lens types can be stored. Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. Choose the AF tuning value used when no previously saved value Default exists for the current lens (CPU lenses only). Move focal point toward camera. Current value Previous value U 361 Option Description List previously saved AF tuning values. If a value exists for the current lens, it will be shown with a V icon. To delete a lens from the list, highlight the desired lens and press O. To change a lens identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the List fact that [Saved value] can be used with only one lens of each saved type), highlight the desired lens and press 2. values The menu shown at right will be displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an identifier and press J to save changes and exit. D AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied. D Live View (Tripod) Mode Tuning is not applied to contrast-detect autofocus when [Tripod] is selected in live view mode (pg. 94). A Saved Value Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter. Firmware Version View the current camera firmware version. U 362 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card. The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera. For information on using the shooting menu, see “Tutorial: Camera Menus” (pg. 26). i j k l m n o p Option D-Lighting * Red-eye correction * Trim Monochrome * Filter effects * Color balance * Image overlay Side-by-side comparison See page 366 367 368 369 370 370 371 374 * Not available with photographs taken with [Monochrome] selected for [Set Picture Control] (pg. 164). U 363 Creating Retouched Copies 1 Select an item in the retouch menu. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2 to select. Depending on the option selected, a menu may be displayed; highlight an option and press 2. 2 Select a picture. The pictures on the memory card will be displayed. Use the multi selector to highlight a picture (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the N button). If two memory cards are inserted, the slot can be selected by holding the N button and pressing 1. The menu shown at right will be displayed (pg. 228); highlight the desired slot and press J. 3 U 364 Display retouch options. Press J to display retouch options (see the section for the selected option for details). To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G. 4 Create a retouched copy. Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched copies are indicated by a N icon. D Retouching Copies Copies created with [Trim] can not be further modified. D-lighting, red-eye correction, filter effects, and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies. Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies, although this may result in loss of detail. A Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with [Trim] (pg. 369) and [Image overlay], copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original, copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies created from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images of the same size as the original. Sizepriority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format. U 365 D-Lighting D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs. Before Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph. U 366 After Red-Eye Correction This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction is previewed as shown at right. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table. Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before proceeding. To Use Zoom in N+ Zoom out N+ View other areas of image N+ Cancel zoom Create copy J J Description Press N button and rotate main command dial right to zoom in, left to zoom out. While photo is zoomed in, press N and use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame. While N button is pressed, area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom. If the camera detects red-eye in the selected photograph, a copy will be created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye. U 367 Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following table. To Use Reduce size of crop N+ Increase size of crop N+ Change crop aspect ratio Move crop Use multi selector to move crop to other area of image. Preview crop Press center of multi selector to preview cropped image. Create copy U 368 Description Press N button and rotate main command dial right to reduce the size of the crop. Press N button and rotate main command dial left to increase the size of the crop. Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, and 5 : 4. J Save the current crop as a separate file. A Trim: Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos have an image quality (pg. 66) of JPEG fine; cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio. Aspect ratio 3:2 4:3 5:4 Possible sizes 4,864 × 3,240, 3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856, 960 × 640, 640 × 424 4,864 × 3,648, 3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960, 960 × 720, 640 × 480 4,560 × 3,648, 3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960, 896 × 720, 608 × 480 Monochrome Copy photographs in [Black-and-white], [Sepia], or [Cyanotype] (blue and white monochrome). Selecting [Sepia] or [Cyanotype] displays a preview of the selected image; press 1 to increase color saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J to create a monochrome copy. Increase saturation Decrease saturation U 369 Filter Effects Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph. Option Skylight Warm filter Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the picture less blue. The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right. Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in the monitor. Color Balance Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below. The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red, green, and blue histograms (pg. 232) giving the distribution of tones in the copy. Press J to copy the photograph. Increase amount of green Increase amount of blue Increase amount of amber Increase amount of magenta A U 370 Creating JPEG Copies of NEF (RAW) Pictures To create a JPEG copy of an NEF (RAW) picture, select the NEF (RAW) picture for [Color balance] and press J without modifying color balance. The JPEG copy will have an image quality of “fine” and a size of [L]. Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals with results that are noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (pp. 66, 70; all options are available). To create a NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of [NEF (RAW)]. 1 Select [Image overlay]. Highlight [Image overlay] in the retouch menu and press 2. The dialog shown at right will be displayed, with [Image 1] highlighted. 2 Display NEF (RAW) images. Press J. A picture selection dialog will be displayed. 3 Highlight a photograph. Press 134 or 2 to highlight the first photograph in the overlay. To view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the N button. U 371 4 Select the highlighted photograph. Press J to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display. The selected image will appear as [Image 1]. 5 Set gain. Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to select the gain for image 1 from values between 0.1 and 2.0. The default value is 1.0; selecting 0.5 cuts gain in half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain. The effects of gain are visible in the [Preview] column. 6 Select the second photograph. Press 4 or 2 to highlight [Image 2]. Repeat Steps 2–5 to select the second photo and adjust gain. 7 U 372 Highlight the [Preview] column. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the [Preview] column. 8 Preview the overlay. Press 1 or 3 to highlight [Overlay] and press J (to save the overlay without displaying a preview, highlight [Save] and press J). To return to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain, press N. 9 Save the overlay. Press J while the preview is displayed to save the overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting image will be displayed full-frame in the monitor. + D Image Overlay Only NEF (RAW) photographs created with the D3X can be selected for image overlay. Other images are not displayed in the selection screen. Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit-depth can be combined. The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for [Image 1]. Overlays saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for [Type] in the [NEF (RAW) recording] menu and have the same bit depth as the original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority compression. U 373 Side-by-Side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. 1 Select [Side-by-side comparison]. Highlight [Side-by-side comparison] and press 2 to display a picture-selection dialog. 2 Select a picture. Use the multi selector to highlight a picture and press J. Only retouched copies (shown by a N icon) or photographs that have been retouched can be selected. To view the highlighted photograph full frame, press and hold the N button. U 374 3 Compare the copy with the original. Options used to create copy The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the right, with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display. Press the multi selector in the Source Retouched image copy direction indicated by the arrow adjacent to the highlighted image (1 3 4 or 2) to switch between the source image and the retouched copy. To view the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the N button. If the copy was created from two images using [Image overlay], press 1 or 3 to view the other source image. To exit to playback mode, press the G button. To return to Step 2 with the highlighted image selected, press J or the center of the multi selector. D Side-by-Side Comparison The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has since been deleted, is currently protected (pg. 244) or hidden (pg. 281), or contains embedded image authentication information (pg. 356). U 375 O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu The [My Menu] option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu (pg. 380). Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below. For information on basic menu operations, see “Tutorial: Camera Menus” (pg. 26). Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select [Add items]. In My Menu (O), highlight [Add items] and press 2 2 Select a menu. Highlight the name of the menu containing the option you wish to add and press 2. 3 U 376 Select an item. Highlight the desired menu item and press J. 4 Position the new item. Press 1 or 3 to move the new item up or down in My Menu. Press J to add the new item. 5 Add more items. The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check mark. Items indicated by a V icon can not be selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional items. U 377 Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select [Remove items]. In My Menu (O), highlight [Remove items] and press 2. 2 Select items. Highlight items and press 2 to select or deselect. Selected items are indicated by a check mark. 3 Select [Done]. Highlight [Done] and press J. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. 4 Delete the selected items. Press J to delete the selected items. U A Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the selected item from My Menu. 378 Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select [Rank items]. In My Menu (O), highlight [Rank items] and press 2. 2 Select an item. Highlight the item you wish to move and press J. 3 Position the item. Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition additional items. U A Reordering Items in My Menu The item currently highlighted in My Menu can be moved up or down by pressing the N button and pressing 1 or 3. Release the N button when the operation is complete. 379 Displaying Recent Settings To display the twenty most recently used settings, select [Recent settings] for [My Menu] > [Choose tab]. 1 Select [Choose tab]. In My Menu (O), highlight [Choose tab] and press 2. 2 Select [Recent Settings]. Highlight [Recent settings] and press J. The name of the menu will change from “MY MENU” to “RECENT SETTINGS.” Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used. To view My Menu again, select [My Menu] for [Recent settings] > [Choose tab]. U 380 nTechnical Notes – Camera Care, Options, and Resources This chapter covers the following topics: Compatible Lenses......................................................... pg. 382 Other Accessories........................................................... pg. 387 Caring for the Camera ................................................... pg. 395 Storage .............................................................................................. pg. 395 Cleaning............................................................................................ pg. 395 Replacing the Focusing Screen ................................................ pg. 396 Replacing the Clock Battery....................................................... pg. 398 The Low-Pass Filter........................................................................ pg. 400 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions ........... pg. 403 Troubleshooting............................................................. pg. 407 Error Messages................................................................ pg. 414 Appendix ......................................................................... pg. 421 Specifications.................................................................. pg. 431 n 381 Compatible Lenses Camera setting CPU lenses 1 Lens/accessory Type G or D AF Nikkor 2 AF-S, AF-I Nikkor PC-E NIKKOR series PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 4 AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter 7 Other AF Nikkor (except lenses for F3AF) AI-P Nikkor AI-, AI-modified, Nikkor or Nikon Series E lenses 12 Medical-Nikkor 120mm f/4 Reflex-Nikkor PC-Nikkor AI-type Teleconverter 18 PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 19 Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11) Non-CPU lenses 11 1 2 3 4 n 382 5 6 7 8 Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode a P A Z S M 3D Color b S C M (with electronic rangefinder) M ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔5 ✔ ✔5 ✔5 ✔5 — ✔ 3,5 — ✔5 ✔ — ✔6 ✔ — ✔3 ✔8 ✔8 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔3 ✔9 ✔9 ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔3 — ✔ 10 ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ ✔3 — ✔ 10 ✔ — ✔ 13 — ✔ 14 ✔ 15 — ✔ ✔ — ✔ 16 — — — — — ✔5 ✔8 ✔ ✔ ✔ — ✔ 13 — — ✔ 15 — ✔ 17 — — ✔ — ✔ 13 — ✔ 14 ✔ 15 — ✔8 ✔ — ✔ 20 — — ✔ — ✔8 ✔ — ✔ 13 — — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔3 — IX-Nikkor lenses can not be used. Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses. Spot metering meters selected focus point. The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used. Can not be used with shifting or tilting. Manual exposure mode only. Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (pg. 385). With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster. 9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35– 70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus. 10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. 11 Some lenses can not be used (see page 384). 12 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body. Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera. 13 If maximum aperture is specified using [Non-CPU lens data] (pg. 218), aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and top control panel. 14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using [Non-CPU lens data] (pg. 218). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired results are not achieved. 15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using [Non-CPU lens data] (pg. 218). 16 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than 1/125 s. 17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens. 18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35– 105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See teleconverter manual for details. 19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required depending on camera orientation. 20 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph. • PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder. n 383 D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D3X: • TC-16AS AF teleconverter • Non-AI lenses • Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11) • Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6) • 2.1cm f/4 • Extension Ring K2 • 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180) • 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127) • 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490) • AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/ 2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16) • PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier) • PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200) • PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type) • Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type) • Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000) • Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310) A Lens f-number The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens. A Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring. CPU contacts CPU lens n 384 Aperture ring Type G lens Type D lens A The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and AF-I lenses: • • • • • • • • • • • AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED 1 AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED AF-S 300mm f/4D ED 2 AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2 • • • • • • • • • • • AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2 AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2 AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2 AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2 AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2 AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2 AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2 AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2 1 Autofocus not supported. 2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF-S Teleconverter TC-17E II/TC-20E II. A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses If lens data are specified using [Non-CPU lens data] (pg. 218), many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU lenses. If lens data are not specified, color matrix metering can not be used, and center-weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected. Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes g and h, when aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum aperture has not been specified using [Non-CPU lens data], the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture; the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring. Aperture-priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes e and f. The exposure-mode indicator (e or f ) in the top control panel will blink, and g will be displayed in the viewfinder. n 385 A Picture Angle and Focal Length The D3X can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm (135) format cameras. If [Auto DX crop] is on (the default setting) and a 35mm format lens is attached, the picture angle will be the same as a frame of 35mm film (35.9 × 24.0 mm); if a DX lens is attached, the picture angle will automatically be adjusted to 23.6 × 15.7 mm (DX format). To choose a picture angle different from that of the current lens, turn [Auto DX crop] off and select from [FX format (36 × 24)], [DX format (24 × 16)], and [5 : 4 (30 × 24)]. If a 35mm format lens is attached, the picture angle could be reduced by 1.5 × by selecting [DX format (24 × 16)], exposing a smaller area, or the aspect ratio could be changed by selecting [5 : 4 (30 × 24)]. [FX format (36 × 24)] picture size (35.9 × 24.0 mm, equivalent to 35mm format camera) Lens Picture diagonal [DX format (24 × 16)] picture size (23.6 × 15.7 mm, equivalent to DX format camera) [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] picture size (30.0 × 24.0 mm) Picture angle ([FX format (36 × 24)]; 35mm format) Picture angle ([DX format (24 × 16)]; DX format) Picture angle ([5 : 4 (30 × 24)]) n 386 The [DX format (24 × 16)] picture angle is about 1.5 times smaller than the 35mm format picture angle, while the [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] picture angle is about 1.1 times smaller. To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when [DX format (24 × 16)] is selected, multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1.5, or by about 1.1 when [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] is selected (for example, the effective focal length of a 50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when [DX format (24 × 16)] is selected, or 55 mm when [5 : 4 (30 × 24)] is selected). Other Accessories At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D3X. Power sources Wireless LAN adapters • Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL4a, EN-EL4 (pp. 32, 34): Additional EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives. These batteries can be recharged and calibrated using an MH-22 or MH-21 quick charger. • Quick Charger MH-22, MH-21 (pp. 32, 437): The MH-22, MH-21 can be used to recharge and calibrate EN-EL4a and EN-EL4 batteries. • AC Adapter EH-6: The EH-6 can be used to power the camera for extended periods. • Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks. The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same network or copied to a computer for long-term storage. The camera can also be controlled from any computer on the network using Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately). Note that the WT-4 requires an independent power source; an EH-6 AC adapter or an EN-EL3e battery is recommended. See the WT-4 manual for details. n 387 • Focusing Screens (pg. 396): The focusing screens available for the D3X are listed below. Type B Brite View A type B focusing screen is supplied with the clear-matte VI focusing camera. screen Type E focusing screens are etched with a grid, Type E making them suitable clear-matte for copying and architectural VI focusing Viewfinder screen photography. Best eyepiece results are achieved with accessories PC-Nikkor lenses. • Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder. Use for close-up photography, copying, telephoto lenses, and other tasks that call for added precision. DK-18 eyepiece adapter (available separately) required. • Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-14, DK-17A: These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions. The DK-17A is equipped with a safety lock. • Rubber Eyepiece Cup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue. n 388 • Diopter-adjustment viewfinder lenses: To accommodate individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2 m–1 (values with camera diopter control centered at –1 m–1). Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment control (–3 to +1 m–1). Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved. The DK-17C is equipped with a safety lock. • Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M: The DK-17M magnifies the view Viewfinder through the viewfinder by approximately 1.2 × for greater eyepiece precision when framing. accessories • Right-Angle Magnifying Viewing Attachment DR-5/Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-4: The DR-5 and DR-4 attach to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position. The DR-5 can also magnify the view through the viewfinder by 2 × for greater precision when framing (note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when the view is magnified). • Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching the DG-2 Magnifier or DR-3 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment to the D3X. n 389 • Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in, slip-in, and rear-interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters manufactured by other makers may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding. • The D3X can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL circular polarizing filter instead. • Use NC and L37C filters to protect the lens. Filters • To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame. • Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). • Nikon Speedlights SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 • Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200 (Controlled remotely Optional using the SB-900, SB-800 flash unit or SU-800 wireless flash units Speedlight commander.) • Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800 See page 187 for more information. • Water Guard WG-AS1: The optional WG-AS1 is a water guard that Water covers the base of SB-900 flash units mounted on the D3X, guards increasing the SB-900’s splash resistance by protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and spray. • EC-AD1 PC Card Adapter: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows PC card Type I CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in adapters PCMCIA card slots. n 390 Software • Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such advanced editing features as selection control points and an auto retouch brush. • Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk. • Image Authentication: Determine whether photographs taken with image authentication on have been modified after shooting. Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet. Body cap • BF-1B and BF-1A Body Caps: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place. n 391 The D3X is equipped with a ten-pin remote terminal for remote control and automatic photography. The terminal is provided with a cap, which protects the contacts when the terminal is not in use. The following accessories can be used (all lengths are approximate): • Remote Cord MC-22: Remote shutter release with blue, yellow, and black terminals for connection to a remote shuttertriggering device, allowing control via sound or electronic signals (length 1 m /3 ft. 3 in.). Remote • Remote Cord MC-30: Remote shutter release; can be used to terminal reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time accessories exposure (length 80 cm /2 ft. 7 in.). • Remote Cord MC-36: Remote shutter release; can be used for interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure. Equipped with back-lit control panel, shutter-release lock for use in bulb photography, and timer that beeps at one-second intervals (length 85 cm /2 ft. 9 in.). • Extension Cord MC-21: Can be connected to ML-3 or MC-series 20, 22, 23, 25, 30, or 36. Only one MC-21 can be used at a time (length 3 m /9 ft. 10 in.). • Connecting Cord MC-23: Connects two cameras for simultaneous operation (length 40 cm /1 ft. 4 in.). n 392 • Adapter Cord MC-25: Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for connection to devices with two-pin terminals, including the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2 modulite control set (length 20 cm /8 in.). • GPS Adapter Cord MC-35 (pg. 221): Connects GPS devices to D3X Remote via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device, terminal allowing latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated Universal accessories Time (UTC, pg. 224), and heading to be recorded with photographs (length 35 cm /14 in.). • GPS Unit GP-1 (pg. 221): Record latitude, longitude, altitude, and UTC time with pictures. • Modulite Remote Control Set ML-3: Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8 m (26 ft.). n 393 ❚❚ Approved Memory Cards The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D3X: SanDisk Lexar Media Extreme IV SDCFX4 Extreme III SDCFX3 Ultra II SDCFH Standard SDCFB 8 GB 4 GB 2 GB 8 GB 4 GB 2 GB 1 GB 8 GB 4 GB 2 GB 1 GB 4 GB 2 GB 1 GB Professional UDMA Platinum II Professional Microdrive DSCM-11000 3K4-2 3K4-4 3K6 8 GB 4 GB 2 GB 2 GB 80 × 1 GB 512 MB 60 × 4 GB 8 GB 4 GB 133 × WA 2 GB 1 GB 2 GB 80 × Lt 512 MB 300 × 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please contact the manufacturer. n 394 Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that: • are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60% • are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as televisions or radios • are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F) Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, Camera wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign body matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty. These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and Lens, lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can mirror, and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care. Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a Monitor soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals. n 395 Replacing the Focusing Screen A type B clear-matte VI focusing screen is inserted in the camera at shipment. To insert an optional type E clear-matte VI focusing screen for D3X cameras (pg. 388): 1 Remove the lens. Turn the camera off and remove the lens. 2 Unlatch the screen holder. Using the tweezers supplied with the focusing screen, pull the focusing screen latch towards you. The screen holder will spring open. 3 Remove the existing screen. Remove the existing screen, using the supplied tweezers and being careful to handle the screen by the tab to avoid scratches. 4 Insert the replacement screen. Using the tweezers and handling the screen by the tab, set the replacement screen in the holder. n 396 5 Latch the screen holder. Push the front edge of holder upward until it clicks into place. D Replacing Focusing Screens Do not touch the surface of the mirror or focusing screens. A Framing Grids The display in type E focusing screens may be slightly out of position depending on how the focusing screen is placed. n 397 Replacing the Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about four years. If the B icon is displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on, the battery is running low and needs to be replaced. When the battery is exhausted, the B icon will blink while the exposure meters are on. Photographs can still be taken but will not be stamped with the correct time and date, and interval timer photography will not function correctly. Replace the battery as described below. 1 Remove the main battery. The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main battery chamber. Turn the camera off and remove the EN-EL4a battery. 2 Open the clock battery chamber. Slide the clock battery chamber cover toward the front of the main battery chamber. 3 Remove the clock battery. 4 Insert the replacement battery. Insert a new CR1616 lithium battery so that the positive side (the side marked with “+” and the battery name) is visible. n 398 5 Close the clock battery chamber. Slide the clock battery chamber cover towards the back of the main battery chamber until it clicks into place. 6 Replace the main battery. Reinsert the EN-EL4a. 7 Set the camera clock. Set the camera to the current date and time (pg. 40). Until the date and time have been set, the B icon will flash in the top control panel. ACAUTION Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could cause an explosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed. D Inserting the Clock Battery Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation. Inserting the battery incorrectly could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could damage the camera. n 399 The Low-Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the filter as described below. Note, however, that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized service personnel. 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter. A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low-pass filter. If the battery level is below J (60%), turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL4a battery or connect an optional EH-6 AC adapter. 2 Select [Lock mirror up for cleaning]. Remove the lens and turn the camera on. Highlight [Lock mirror up for cleaning] in the setup menu (pg. 346) and press 2 (note that this option is not available at battery levels of J or below). 3 Press J. The message shown at right will be displayed in the monitor and a row of dashes will appear in the top control panel and viewfinder. To restore normal operation without inspecting the low-pass filter, turn the camera off. n 400 4 Raise the mirror. Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open, revealing the low-pass filter. The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the top control panel will blink. 5 Examine the low-pass filter. Holding the camera so that light falls on the low-pass filter, examine the filter for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 7. 6 Clean the filter. Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower. Do not use a blowerbrush, as the bristles could damage the filter. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikonauthorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter. 7 Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap. n 401 D Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions: • Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised. • If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately. D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D3X, however, is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap. Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 391) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging applications. D n 402 Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced. Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration. Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage. Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature. Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry. Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs. n 403 Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon return to normal. The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully. See “The Low-Pass Filter” (pg. 400) for information on cleaning the low-pass filter. Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean. Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain. The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored, but this has no affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction. Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals. To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away. n 404 Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away. Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected. Dry the accessory shoe cover: If the camera is used in the rain, water may penetrate the supplied BS-2 accessory shoe cover. Remove and dry the accessory shoe cover after using the camera in the rain. Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction. Images recorded with the product are unaffected. Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light. Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth. n 405 Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be removed with a soft, dry cloth before use. Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries: Turn the product off before replacing the battery. The battery may become hot when used for extended periods. Observe due caution when handling the battery. Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment. Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat. After removing the battery from the camera, be sure to replace the terminal cover. n 406 Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a spare EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge. Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance. Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations. Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative. Refer to the page numbers in the right-most column for more information. ❚❚ Display Problem Solution Page Adjust viewfinder focus or use Viewfinder is out of focus. 47, 389 optional diopter adjustment lenses. Viewfinder is dark. Insert a fully-charged battery. 48 Choose longer delays for Custom Displays turn off without Setting c2 ([Auto meter-off delay]) 318, 319 warning. or c4 ([Monitor off delay]). Unusual characters See “A Note on Electronically407 appear in control panels. Controlled Cameras,” below. Control panel or The response times and brightness viewfinder displays are of these displays varies with — temperature. unresponsive and dim. A A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the monitor or control panels and the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery, and turn the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately), disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In the event of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative. Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded to the card will not be affected. n 407 ❚❚ Shooting Problem Solution Camera takes time to turn Delete files or folders. on. • Memory card is full or not inserted. • CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f-number. If B is displayed in the top control panel, Shutter-release disabled. select [Aperture ring] for Custom Setting f7 ([Customize command dials]) > [Aperture setting] to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. • Exposure mode S selected with A selected for shutter speed. • Rotate focus-mode selector to S or C. • Camera unable to focus using Photos are out of focus. autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock. n 408 Page — 42, 49 384 116 74 80, 83 Problem Full range of shutter speeds not available. Solution Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 ([Flash sync speed]); when using optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 Speedlight, choose [1/250 s (Auto FP)] for full range of shutter speeds. Page 326 Focus does not lock when Camera is in focus mode C: use AE-L/ shutter-release button is 81 AF-L button to lock focus. pressed halfway. Image size can not be [Image quality] set to [NEF (RAW)]. 70 changed. 78 • Unlock focus selector lock. • Auto-area AF selected for focus 76 mode: choose another mode. 225 • The camera is in playback mode. Can not select focus point 277 • The camera is in menu operation. • Press shutter-release button 50 halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters. Camera is slow to record Turn long exposure noise reduction 300 photos. off. • Sound of mirror clicking down 93 when shutter-release button was pressed halfway in hand-held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter. Photos not recorded in • Unless [Release] is chosen for 93, 306 live view mode. Custom Setting a2 ([AF-S priority selection]), shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when focus mode S is selected in hand-held mode. n 409 Problem Randomly-spaced bright pixels (“noise”) appear in photos. Photos are blotched or smeared. Colors are unnatural. Solution Page • Choose lower ISO sensitivity or 104, 300 turn high ISO noise reduction on. • Shutter speed is slower than 8 s: 300 use long exposure noise reduction. • Clean lens. — 400 • Clean low-pass filter. • Adjust white balance to match 140 light source. • Adjust [Set Picture Control] 162 settings. Can not measure white Subject is too dark or too bright. balance. Image can not be selected as source for preset white Image was not created with D3X. balance. • NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image White balance bracketing quality. unavailable. • Multiple exposure mode is in effect. n 410 152 155 66 209 Problem Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image. Metering can not be changed. Exposure compensation can not be used. Reddish areas appear in photos. Textures are uneven. Solution “A” (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of photographs, choose a setting other than “A” (auto). Page Autoexposure lock is in effect. 127 Choose exposure mode e, f, or g. 128 Reddish areas and uneven textures may appear in long timeexposures. Turn long exposure noise reduction on when shooting at shutter speeds of “A”. 300 168 n 411 ❚❚ Playback Problem Flashing areas appear in images. Shooting data appear on images. A graph appears during playback. NEF (RAW) image is not played back. Some photos are not displayed during playback. “Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation. Can not delete photo. Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback. Can not change print order. n 412 Solution Press 1 or 3 to choose photo information displayed. Page 229, 282 Photo was taken at image quality of NEF + JPEG. 67 Select [All] for [Playback folder]. 281 • Select [On] for [Rotate tall]. • Photo was taken with [Off ] selected for [Auto image rotation]. • Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken. Photo is protected: remove protection. 287 351 244 Select [All] for [Playback folder]. 281 Memory card is full: delete photos. 49 Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Transfer Can not select photo to computer and print using supplied for printing. software or Capture NX 2. • Set [USB] to [MTP/PTP]. • NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos can not be printed by direct USB connection. Use Can not print photos. DPOF print service (TIFF images only) or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX 2. Photo is not Choose correct video mode. displayed on TV. 351 262 352 262 348 Problem Photo is not displayed on highdefinition video device. Can not copy photos to computer. Photos not displayed in Capture NX 2. Can not use Camera Control Pro 2. Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera. Solution Page Confirm that HDMI cable (available separately) is connected. 276 Choose correct [USB] option. 257 Update software to latest version. 391 Set [USB] to [MTP/PTP]. 257 Third-party software does not display effects of Picture Controls, active D-Lighting, or vignette control. Use ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately). — ❚❚ Miscellaneous Problem Date of recording is not correct. Solution Page Set camera clock. 40 Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings. Note Menu item can not be that [Battery info] option is not available selected. when camera is powered by optional EH-6 AC adapter. 355 n 413 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder, top control panel, and monitor. Indicator Control Viewpanel finder B (blinks) H d Problem Lens aperture ring is not set to minimum aperture. Low battery. H d Battery exhausted. (blinks) (blinks) Replace battery. d Battery can not be G (blinks) (blinks) used. Contact Nikonauthorized service representative. B (blinks) — Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock. No lens attached, or non-CPU lens attached without specifying F maximum aperture. Aperture shown in stops from maximum aperture. 2 4 Camera unable to focus — (blinks) using autofocus. n 414 Solution Set ring to minimum aperture (largest f-number). Ready a fully-charged spare battery. Page 38 48 32, 34 — 40 Aperture value will be displayed if maximum aperture is specified. 218 Focus manually. 83 Indicator Control Viewpanel finder q Problem Subject too bright; photo will be overexposed. Solution • Use a lower ISO sensitivity. • Use optional ND filter. In exposure mode: f Increase shutter speed g Choose a smaller aperture (larger f-number) Page 104 390 116 118 n 415 Indicator Control Viewpanel finder Solution Page • Use a higher ISO 104 sensitivity. • Use optional flash. In 187 exposure mode: Subject too dark; photo f Lower shutter 116 r will be underexposed. speed g Choose a larger 118 aperture (smaller f-number) Change shutter speed A A selected in or select manual 116, 120 (blinks) exposure mode f. exposure mode. Optional flash unit that Change flash mode c does not support i-TTL setting on optional 191 (blinks) flash control attached flash unit. (blinks) and set to TTL. Check photo in If indicator blinks for 3s monitor; if c 191 after flash fires, photo — underexposed, adjust (blinks) may be underexposed. settings and try again. n 416 Problem Indicator Control Viewpanel finder Problem Flash unit that does not support red-eye Y — reduction attached and (blinks) flash sync mode set to red-eye reduction. Memory insufficient to record further photos A g at current settings, or (blinks) (blinks) camera has run out of file or folder numbers. O (blinks) Camera malfunction. Solution Page Change flash sync mode or use flash unit that supports red-eye reduction. 189 • Reduce quality or size. • Delete photographs. • Insert new memory card. Release shutter. If error persists or appears frequently, consult Nikon-authorized service representative. 66, 70 281 42 — n 417 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Camera cannot S detect memory card. • Error accessing memory card. Solution Page Turn camera off and No memory confirm that card is 42 card. correctly inserted. • Use Nikon394 This memory approved card. • Check that contacts card cannot — be used. are clean. If card is Card may be damaged, contact (blinks) damaged. retailer or Nikon Insert another representative. • Unable to create • Delete files or insert 42, 281 card. new folder. new memory card. This card is not Memory card has Format memory card C 42, 45 not been formatted or insert new formatted. (blinks) for use in camera. memory card. Format the card. n 418 Indicator Control Monitor panel Folder contains no images. — All images are hidden. — File does not contain image data. — Cannot select this file — Problem Solution Page Select folder No images on containing images memory card or in from [Playback folder] 42, 281 folder(s) selected menu or insert for playback. different memory card. No images can be played back until another folder has All photos in been selected or 281 current folder are [Hide image] used to hidden. allow at least one image to be displayed. File has been created or modified using a computer File can not be played — or different make of back on camera. camera, or file is corrupt. Memory card does Images created with not contain images other devices can not 364 that can be be retouched. retouched. n 419 Indicator Control Monitor panel Check printer. — Check paper. — Paper jam. — Out of paper. — Check ink supply. — Out of ink. — Problem Solution Check printer. To resume, select Printer error. [Continue] (if available). Insert paper of Paper in printer is correct size and select not of selected size. [Continue]. Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select printer. [Continue]. Insert paper of Printer is out of selected size and paper. select [Continue]. Check ink. To resume, Ink error. select [Continue]. Replace ink and Printer is out of ink. select [Continue]. * See printer manual for more information. n 420 Page 263 * 263 * 263 * 263 * 263 * 263 * Appendix The Appendix covers the following topics: • Defaults ................................................................................................ pg. 422 • Memory Card Capacity ................................................................. pg. 427 • Exposure Program .......................................................................... pg. 430 n 421 Defaults The following defaults are restored either with a two-button reset or using [Reset shooting menu] or [Reset custom settings]. ❚❚ Defaults Restored with a Two-Button Reset (pg. 204) 1 Option [ISO sensitivity] (pg. 104) [Image quality] (pg. 66) Shooting [Image size] (pg. 70) menu 2 [White balance] (pg. 140) Fine tuning (pg. 143) [Choose color temp.] (pg. 147) Focus point (pg. 78) Exposure mode (pg. 112) Flexible program (pg. 115) Shutter speed and aperture lock (pg. 123) Other AE lock hold (pg. 125) settings Exposure compensation (pg. 128) Bracketing (pg. 130) Flash mode (pg. 194) FV lock (pg. 198) Multiple exposure (pg. 206) Default 100 JPEG normal L Auto Off 5000 K Center Programmed auto Off Off Off Off Off Front-curtain sync Off Off 1 If the current Picture Control has been modified, existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored. 2 Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the [Shooting menu bank] option will be reset (pg. 291). Settings in all other banks are unaffected. n 422 ❚❚ Defaults Restored with [Reset Shooting Menu] (pg. 293) 1 Option [File naming] (pg. 296) [Slot 2] (pg. 72) [Image quality] (pg. 66) [Image size] (pg. 70) [Image area] (pg. 60) [Auto DX crop] (pg. 60) [Choose image area] (pg. 61) [JPEG compression] (pg. 68) [NEF (RAW) recording] (pg. 69) [Type] (pg. 69) [NEF (RAW) bit depth] (pg. 69) [White balance] (pg. 140) Fine tuning (pg. 143) [Choose color temp.] (pg. 147) [Set Picture Control] (pg. 162) [Color space] (pg. 183) [Active D-Lighting] (pg. 181) [Vignette control] (pg. 299) [Long exp. NR] (pg. 300) [High ISO NR] (pg. 300) [ISO sensitivity settings] (pg. 104) [ISO sensitivity] (pg. 104) [ISO sensitivity auto control] (pg. 106) [Live view] (pg. 90) [Live view mode] (pg. 91) [Release mode] (pg. 91) [Multiple exposure] (pg. 206) [Interval timer shooting] (pg. 211) Default DSC Overflow JPEG normal Large On FX format (36 × 24) Size priority Lossless compressed 12-bit Auto Off 5000K Standard sRGB Off Normal Off Normal 100 Off Hand-held Single frame Reset 2 Reset 3 1 With the exception of [Multiple exposure] and [Interval timer shooting], only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset. 2 Applies to all banks. [Reset shooting menu] can not be selected while shooting is in progress. 3 Applies to all banks. Shooting ends when reset is performed. n 423 ❚❚ Defaults Restored with [Reset Custom Settings] (pg. 304) * a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 a10 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 c1 c2 c3 c4 Option [AF-C priority selection] (pg. 305) [AF-S priority selection] (pg. 306) [Dynamic AF area] (pg. 307) [Focus tracking with lock-on] (pg. 309) [AF activation] (pg. 309) [Focus point illumination] (pg. 310) [Manual focus mode] [Continuous mode] [Focus point brightness] [Focus point wrap-around] (pg. 311) [AF point selection] (pg. 311) [AF-ON button] (pg. 312) [Vertical AF-ON button] (pg. 313) [ISO sensitivity step value] (pg. 314) [EV steps for exposure cntrl.] (pg. 314) [EV steps for exposure comp.] (pg. 314) [Easy exposure compensation] (pg. 315) [Center-weighted area] (pg. 316) [Fine tune optimal exposure] (pg. 316) [Matrix metering] [Center-weighted] [Spot metering] [Shutter-release button AE-L] (pg. 318) [Auto meter-off delay] (pg. 318) [Self-timer delay] (pg. 319) [Monitor off delay] (pg. 319) Default Release Focus 9 points Normal Shutter/AF-ON On On Normal No wrap 51 points AF-ON AF-ON 1/3 step 1/3 step 1/3 step Off ø 12 mm 0 0 0 Off 6s 10 s 20 s * Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the [Custom setting bank] option will be reset (pg. 304). Settings in all other banks are unaffected. n 424 Option d1 [Beep] (pg. 320) [Shooting speed] (pg. 321) d2 [Continuous high-speed] [Continuous low-speed] d3 [Max. continuous release] (pg. 321) d4 [File number sequence] (pg. 322) [Control panel/viewfinder] (pg. 323) d5 [Rear control panel] [Viewfinder display] d6 [Shooting info display] (pg. 324) d7 [LCD illumination] (pg. 325) d8 [Exposure delay mode] (pg. 325) e1 [Flash sync speed] (pg. 326) e2 [Flash shutter speed] (pg. 327) e3 [Modeling flash] (pg. 327) e4 [Auto bracketing set] (pg. 328) e5 [Auto bracketing (Mode M)] (pg. 329) e6 [Bracketing order] (pg. 330) Default Off 5 fps 3 fps 130 On ISO sensitivity Frame count Auto Off Off 1/250 s 1/60 s On AE & flash Flash/speed MTR > under > over n 425 Option [Multi selector center button] (pg. 331) [Shooting mode] f1 [Playback mode] [Live view] f2 [Multi selector] (pg. 332) f3 [Photo info/playback] (pg. 332) [Assign FUNC. button] (pg. 333) [FUNC. button press] f4 [FUNC. button+dials] f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 n 426 [Assign preview button] (pg. 339) [Preview button press] [Preview+command dials] [Assign AE-L/AF-L button] (pg. 340) [AE-L/AF-L button press] [AE-L/AF-L+command dials] [Customize command dials] (pg. 341) [Reverse rotation] (pg. 341) [Change main/sub] (pg. 341) [Aperture setting] (pg. 342) [Menus and playback] (pg. 342) [Release button to use dial] (pg. 343) [No memory card?] (pg. 344) [Reverse indicators] (pg. 345) Default Select center focus point Thumbnail on/off Select center focus point Do nothing Info /Playback None Choose image area (FX/DX/5:4) Preview None AE/AF lock None No Off Sub-command dial Off No Enable release Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 4 GB SanDisk Extreme IV (SDCFX4) card at different image quality, image size, and image area settings. ❚❚ FX format (36 × 24) Image Area Image quality NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 14-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit NEF (RAW), Uncompressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Uncompressed, 14-bit TIFF (RGB) JPEG fine 3 JPEG normal 3 JPEG basic 3 Image size File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2 — 27.6 MB 100 24 — 35.6 MB 77 28 — 23.0 MB 137 26 — 29.4 MB 114 34 — 38.9 MB 100 22 — 50.6 MB 77 21 L M S L M S L M S L M S 73.5 MB 41.5 MB 18.6 MB 14.1 MB 7.9 MB 3.6 MB 7.1 MB 4.0 MB 1.8 MB 3.6 MB 2.1 MB 0.9 MB 53 94 210 277 491 1000 552 976 2100 1000 1800 4100 22 23 30 44 78 80 61 80 83 69 82 83 n 427 ❚❚ DX Format (24 × 16) Image Area Image quality NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 14-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit NEF (RAW), Uncompressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Uncompressed, 14-bit TIFF (RGB) JPEG fine 3 JPEG normal 3 JPEG basic 3 n 428 Image size File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2 — 12.1 MB 229 32 — 15.5 MB 176 52 — 10.1 MB 313 38 — 12.9 MB 260 83 — 17.0 MB 229 29 — 22.1 MB 176 32 L M S L M S L M S L M S 31.7 MB 17.9 MB 8.1 MB 6.1 MB 3.4 MB 1.6 MB 3.1 MB 1.8 MB 0.8 MB 1.6 MB 0.9 MB 0.4 MB 123 218 484 644 1100 2400 1200 2200 4800 2400 4100 8900 24 29 40 76 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded. 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops if [Optimal quality] is selected for [JPEG compression], ISO sensitivity is set to P or higher, [High ISO NR] is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO sensitivity is set to 500 or higher, or long exposure noise reduction, active D-Lighting or image authentication is on. 3 Figures assume [JPEG compression] is set to [Size priority]. Selecting [Optimal quality] increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly. A d3—Max. Continuous Release (pg. 321) The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 130. n 429 Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph: 12 14 f/1 13 11 9 10 8 7 5 6 3 2 4 0 1 -1 -3 -2 ] V [E -4 ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D) 16 15 f/1.4 16 17 18 19 f/5.6 f/8 20 f/2.8 f/4 f/1.4 − f/16 Aperture 1 /3 f/2 21 f/11 22 f/16 f/32 23 f/22 30" 15" 8" 4" 2" 1" 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent. When matrix metering is used, values over 16 1/3 EV are reduced to 16 1/3 EV. n 430 Specifications ❚❚ Nikon D3X Digital Camera Type Type Single-lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts) Effective pixels Effective pixels 24.5 million Image sensor Image sensor 35.9 × 24.0 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon FX format) Total pixels 25.72 million Dust-reduction System Image Dust Off reference data (optional Capture NX 2 software required) Storage Image size (pixels) File format • FX format (36 × 24) image area 6,048 × 4,032 (L) 4,544 × 3,024 (M) 3,024 × 2,016 (S) • DX format (24 × 16) image area 3,968 × 2,640 (L) 2,976 × 1,976 (M) 1,984 × 1,320 (S) • 5 : 4 (30 × 24) image area 5,056 × 4,032 (L) 3,792 × 3,024 (M) 2,528 × 2,016 (S) • NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed, compressed, or uncompressed • TIFF (RGB) • JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression ([Size priority]); [Optimal quality] compression available • NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome; storage for up to nine custom Picture Controls Media Type I and II CompactFlash memory cards (UDMA compliant); microdrives n 431 Storage Double slot Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images File system DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras), PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage • FX format: Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical • DX format: Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical • 5 : 4: Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical Magnification Approx. 0.7 × (50-mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1) Eyepoint 18 mm (–1.0 m–1) Diopter adjustment –3–+1 m–1 Focusing screen Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte VI screen Reflex mirror Quick return Depth-of-field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed, lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user (g and h modes) or by camera (e and f modes) Lens aperture Instant return, electronically controlled Lens Compatible lenses n 432 • DX AF Nikkor: All functions supported • Type G or D AF Nikkor: All functions supported (PC MicroNikkor does not support some functions). IX Nikkor lenses not supported. • Other AF Nikkor: All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported. • AI-P Nikkor: All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II • Non-CPU: Can be used in exposure modes g and h; electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster; color matrix metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data (AI lenses only) Shutter Type Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter Speed 1/8000 – Flash sync speed X= 1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/250 s or slower 30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, X250 Release Release mode S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH (continuous high speed), a (live view), E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up) Frame advance rate • DX format (24 × 16): Up to 5 fps (CL) or 5–7 fps (CH) • Other image areas: Up to 5 fps Self-timer Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using 1,005-segment RGB sensor Metering method • Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data • Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to12-mm circle in center of frame. Diameter of circle can be changed to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm circle or average of entire frame) • Spot: Meters 4-mm circle (about 1.5% of frame) centered on selected focus point (on center focus point when non-CPU lens is used) Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens, 20 °C/68 °F) • Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV • Spot metering: 2–20 EV Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program (e); shutterpriority auto (f ); aperture priority auto (g); manual (h) Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV Exposure bracketing 2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV Flash bracketing 2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV n 433 Exposure White balance bracketing 2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3 Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button ISO sensitivity (Recommended Exposure Index) ISO 100 – 1600 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 50 equivalent) below ISO 100 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 6400 equivalent) above ISO 1600. Active D-Lighting Can be selected from [Auto], [Extra high], [High], [Normal], [Low], or [Off ] Focus Autofocus Nikon Multi-CAM 3500FX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, 51 focus points (including 15 cross-type sensors) Detection range –1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F) Lens servo • Autofocus: Single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF (C); predictive focus tracking automatically activated according to subject status • Manual (M): Electronic range finding supported Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points AF-area mode Single-point AF, dynamic-area AF, auto-area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button Flash Flash control • TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR using combined 1,005-segment RGB sensor are available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400 • Auto aperture: Available with SB-900 or SB-800 and CPU lens • Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900, SB-800, SB-28, SB-27, and SB-22s • Distance-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800 Flash mode Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync n 434 Flash Flash-ready indicator Lights when Speedlight such as SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full output Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-900, System (CLS) SB-800, or SU-800 as commander and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 as remotes; Auto FP High-Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS-compatible flash units except SB-400; Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS-compatible flash units Sync terminal ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread White balance White balance Auto (TTL white-balance with main image sensor and 1,005 segment RGB sensor); 7 manual modes with finetuning; color temperature setting Live view Modes Hand-held, tripod Autofocus • Hand-held: Phase-detection AF with 51 focus points (including 15 cross-type sensors) • Tripod: Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame Monitor Monitor 3-in., 920,000-dot (VGA), low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 ° viewing angle, 100% frame coverage, and brightness adjustment Playback Playback Full-frame and thumbnail (four or nine images) playback with playback zoom, slide show, histogram display, highlight display, auto image rotation, image comment (up to 36 characters), and voice memo input and playback n Interface USB Hi-Speed USB Video output Can be selected from NTSC and PAL 435 Interface HDMI output Type A HDMI connector; camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected Ten-pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control, GP-1 GPS unit, or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2.01 or 3.01 (requires optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D-sub 9-pin connector) Supported languages Supported languages Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish Power source Battery One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL4a battery AC adapter EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) Tripod socket Tripod socket 1/4 in. (ISO 1222) Dimensions/weight Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 159.5 × 157 × 87.5 mm (6.3 × 6.2 × 3.4 in.) Weight Approx. 1,220 g (2 lb 11 oz.) without battery, memory card, body cap, or accessory shoe cover Operating environment Temperature 0–40 °C (32–104 °F) Humidity Less than 85% (no condensation) • Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F). • Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain. n 436 Calibrating Batteries The MH-22 quick charger is equipped with a battery calibration feature. Calibrate the battery as required to ensure the accuracy of the camera and charger battery level displays. If the calibration lamp for the current battery chamber blinks when a battery is inserted, the battery needs to be calibrated. To begin calibration, press the calibration button for the current chamber for about a second. The time needed to calibrate the battery is shown by the charge and calibration lamps: Approximate time needed to recalibrate battery Over 6 hours 4 – 6 hours 2 – 4 hours Under 2 hours Calibration lamp K (glows) K (glows) K (glows) K (glows) Chamber lamps (green) Charge lamps (green) Calibration lamps (yellow) Calibration buttons 2h K (glows) K (glows) K (glows) JK (off ) Charge lamps 4h K (glows) K (glows) JK (off) JK (off) 6h K (glows) JK (off ) JK (off ) JK (off ) When calibration is complete, the calibration and charge lamps will turn off and charging will begin immediately. Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement of battery charge state, calibration need not be performed when the calibration lamp blinks. Once begun, calibration can be interrupted as desired. • If the calibration button is not pressed while the calibration lamp is blinking, normal charging will begin after about ten seconds. • To interrupt calibration, press the calibration button again. Calibration will end and charging will begin. n 437 D Battery Warning If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when no battery is inserted, there is a problem with the charger. If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when a battery is inserted, a problem has occurred with the battery or charger during charging. Remove the battery, unplug the charger, and take the battery and charger to a Nikon-authorized service representative for inspection. A Charging and Calibrating Two Batteries The MH-22 charges only one battery at a time. If batteries are inserted in both chambers, they will be charged in the order inserted. If the calibration button for the first battery is pressed, the second battery can not be calibrated or charged until calibration and charging of the first battery are complete. n 438 MH-22 quick charger Rated input Rated output Supported batteries Charging time per battery AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz) DC 12.6 V/1,200 mA Nikon EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries Approx. 2 hours and 25 minutes (EN-EL4a) or 1 hour and 40 minutes (EN-EL4) when battery is fully discharged Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F) Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 160 × 85 × 50.5 mm (6.3 × 3.3 × 2.0 in.) Length of cord Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.) Weight Approx. 260 g (9.1 oz.), excluding power cable EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Rated capacity 11.1 V/2,500 mAh Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 56.5 × 27 × 82.5 mm (2.2 × 1.1 × 3.2 in.) Weight Approx. 180 g (6.3 oz.), excluding terminal cover n 439 A Supported Standards • DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera. • DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card. • Exif version 2.21: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers. • PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer. • HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection (the camera uses a type A connector). n 440 A Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged EN-EL4a battery (2,500 mAh) varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. Sample figures are given below. • CIPA standard: Approximately 4,400 shots. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/ 3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s. Live view not used. • Nikon standard: Approximately 5,300 shots. Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8 ED lens under the following test conditions: image quality set to JPEG normal, image size set to L (large), shutter speed 1/250 s, shutter-release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off. The following can reduce battery life: • Using the monitor • Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway • Repeated autofocus operations • Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs • Slow shutter speeds • Using the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter • Using the optional GP-1 GPS unit • Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4a batteries: • Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance. • Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused. • Check the condition of the battery regularly using the [Battery info] option in the setup menu (pg. 355). If [j] is displayed for [Calibration], calibrate the battery using the MH-22 quick charger. n 441 Index Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets ([ ]). Symbols K (Single-point AF), 76, 77 I (Dynamic-area AF), 76, 77 H (Auto-area AF), 76, 77 S, 86 CL, 86, 88, 321 CH, 86, 88, 321 a, 90 E (Self-timer), 100 MUP, 102 a (Matrix), 110, 317 Z (Center-weighted), 110, 316, 317 b (Spot), 110, 317 e (Programmed auto), 114 f (Shutter-priority auto), 116 g (Aperture-priority auto), 118 h (Manual), 120 Q (Help), 31 t (Memory buffer), 55, 89, 427 L (Preset manual), 141, 148 Numerics 1,005-segment RGB sensor, 140, 193 3D color matrix metering II, 110, 111 3D-tracking, 308 A A/V, 4, 274 cable, i, 274 AC adapter, 387 Accessories, 387 [Active D-Lighting], 181 [Active folder], 293 AE-L, 81, 125, 340 AF, 74, 305 [AF activation], 309 AF assist, 192 [AF fine tune], 361 [AF point selection], 311 AF-area brackets, 12 442 AF-area mode, 76 auto-area AF, 76, 77 dynamic-area AF, 76, 77, 307 single-point AF, 76, 77 [AF-C priority selection], 305 [AF-ON button], 312 B button, 75, 94, 312 B button for vertical shooting, 75, 313 [AF-S priority selection], 306 [After delete], 287 A-M switch, 37 Amber, 144, 370 Aperture, 38, 112, 118, 124 lock, 124 maximum, 84, 218 minimum, 112, 430 Aperture-priority auto, 118 [Assign AE-L/AF-L button], 340 [Assign FUNC. button], 333 [Assign preview button], 339 Audio, 254, 288, 289, 352 [Audio output], 254, 352 Auto bracketing, 130, 328, 329 [Auto bracketing (Mode M)], 329 [Auto bracketing set], 328 [AE & flash], 131, 328 [AE only], 131, 328 [Flash only], 131, 328 [WB bracketing], 135, 328 Auto FP high-speed sync, 186, 194, 326 [Auto image rotation], 351 Auto meter off, 318 [Auto meter-off delay], 318 Auto-area AF, 76, 77 Autofocus, 74, 76, 78, 80, 82, 305–313 B Backlight, 10, 325 Battery, xviii–xix, 32–36, 406 [Battery info], 355 [Beep], 320 Body cap, 4, 37, 391 Bracketing, 130, 328, 329 exposure, 130, 328 flash, 130, 328 white balance, 130, 135, 328 [Bracketing order], 330 Bulb, 122 Burst, 89, 321, 334 C C, 74, 305 Calibrating, 437 calibration, 355, 437 charging, 32 info, 355 Camera Control Pro 2, 256, 391 Capture NX 2, 66, 353, 391 Center-weighted, 110, 316, 317 [Center-weighted area], 316 Clock, 40, 41 CLS, 186 [Color balance], 370 [Color space], 183 [Adobe RGB], 183 [sRGB], 183 Color space, 183, 240 Color temperature, 140, 142, 147 CompactFlash, 42 Computer, 256 Control panel, 8–11 [Control panel/viewfinder], 323 [Copy image(s)], 283 Copying images, 283 Copyright, 237, 357 [Copyright information], 357 CPU contacts, 384 CPU lens, 38, 384 Creative Lighting System, 186 Crop, 267, 368 [Custom setting bank], 304 Custom Settings, 302 Custom Settings Menu, 302 [Customize command dials], 341 D Date and time, 40, 349 Daylight saving time, 40, 349 DCF version 2.0, 440 Default settings, 204, 422 restoring, 204 [Delete], 281 [All], 281 [Selected], 281 Delete, 58, 245, 281 all images, 281 current image, 245 selected images, 281 Digital Print Order Format, 262, 440 Diopter, 3, 47, 389 adjustment control, 47 adjustment lens, 389 [Display mode], 282 [D-Lighting], 366 DPOF, 262 [Dust off ref photo], 353 [Dynamic AF area], 307 [51 points (3D-tracking)], 308 Dynamic-area AF, 76, 77, 307 E [Easy exposure compensation], 315 Electronic analog exposure display, 120, 122, 128 Ethernet, 261, 387 [EV steps for exposure cntrl.], 314 [EV steps for exposure comp.], 314 Exif version 2.21, 440 Exposure, 109, 112, 125, 128, 130 bracketing, 130 lock, 125 meters, 50, 318 mode, 112 aperture-priority auto, 118 manual, 120 programmed auto, 114 shutter-priority auto, 116 Exposure bracketing, 130 443 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets ([ ]). Exposure compensation, 128 [Exposure delay mode], 325 Exposure preview, 96, 99 F File information, 230 [File naming], 296 [File number sequence], 322 [Filter effects], 370 [Skylight], 370 [Warm filter], 370 [Fine tune optimal exposure], 316 [Firmware version], 362 Flash, 130, 185, 194, 327, 328 bracketing, 130, 328 control, 193 i-TTL balanced-fill flash for digital SLR, 193 standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR, 193 mode, 194 modeling, 327 monitor pre-flash, 186 range, 197 ready indicator, 191, 199 sync speed, 326 sync terminal, 201 [Flash shutter speed], 327 [Flash sync speed], 326 flexible, 115 Fn button, 64, 198, 333 f-number, 38, 112 Focal length, 218 Focal plane mark, 84 Focus, 74 autofocus, 74, 76, 78, 80, 82 contrast-detect, 90, 95, 97 phase-detection, 90 electronic rangefinder, 84, 382 indicator, 55, 74, 84, 305, 306 lock, 80, 82, 312 mode, 74, 305, 306 444 continuous-servo AF, 74, 305 manual, 74, 83, 92 single-servo AF, 74, 306 point, 51, 78, 311 contrast-detect, 90, 95, 97 tracking, 75, 77, 309 3D, 76, 77, 308 predictive, 75 [Focus point illumination], 310 [Focus point wrap-around], 311 [Focus tracking with lock-on], 309 Focusing screen, 388, 396 type B clear-matte VI, 388 type E clear-matte VI, 388 Format, 45, 347 [Format memory card], 347 Front-curtain sync, 194 FV lock, 198, 333 G [GPS], 221 GPS, 221, 229, 238 connecting, 222 data, 229, 238 unit, 221, 393 GPS data, 238 H [HDMI], 348 HDMI, 276, 348, 440 Help, 31 Hi, 105 [Hide image], 281 High definition, 274, 276, 348, 440 [High ISO NR], 300 Highlights, 231, 232, 282 Histogram, 232, 282 I [Image area], 60, 63 [5:4 (30x24)], 61 [Auto DX crop], 60, 63 [Choose image area], 61, 63 [DX format (24x16)], 61 [FX format (36x24)], 61 Image area, 38, 60, 70, 297 [Image authentication], 356 [Image comment], 350 Image Dust Off, 353 [Image overlay], 371 [Image quality], 66 Image quality, 66 [Image review], 287 [Image size], 70 Image size, 70 [Index print], 271 In-focus indicator, 55, 74, 84, 305, 306 Information, 14, 229, 324 [Interval timer shooting], 211 Interval timer shooting, 211 [ISO sensitivity], 104 [ISO sensitivity auto control], 106 [Maximum sensitivity], 106 [Minimum shutter speed], 106 [ISO sensitivity settings], 105 ISO sensitivity, 103 [ISO sensitivity step value], 314 i-TTL, 186, 193 J JPEG, 66, 68, 72 [JPEG compression], 68 [Optimal quality], 68 [Size priority], 68 L L, 70 LAN, 387 [Language], 39, 349 LCD, 10, 325, 347, 404, 405 [LCD brightness], 347 [LCD illumination], 325 Lens, 37, 84, 382 attaching, 37 cap, 37, 38 cap, rear, 37 compatible, 382 CPU, 38, 384 distance information, 193 focus ring, 38 mounting index, 37, 38 non-CPU, 218, 385 data, 219 removing, 38 type D, 384 type G, 384 [Live view], 90 [Live view mode], 91, 94 [Hand-held], 91 [Tripod], 94 [Release mode], 91 Live view, 90–99 Lo, 105 [Lock mirror up for cleaning], 347 [Long exp. NR], 300 M M (manual focus mode), 74, 83 M (medium), 70 Magenta, 144, 370 [Manage Picture Control], 170 Manual, 83, 92, 120 Mass Storage, 257, 352 Matrix, 110, 317, 334 [Max. continuous release], 321 Memory buffer, 88, 89 Memory card, 42, 347, 394 capacity of, 427 formatting, 45, 347 slot, 42, 156, 228 Metering, 110, 317, 334 center-weighted, 110 matrix, 110 selector, 53, 111 spot, 110 Microdrive, 6, 42, 394 Mirror, 86, 102 lock up for cleaning, 400 [Modeling flash], 327 Monitor, 14, 57, 90, 226, 229, 319, 395 Monitor brightness, 99, 347 [Monitor off delay], 319 [Monochrome], 369 [Black-and-white], 369 445 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets ([ ]). [Cyanotype], 369 [Sepia], 369 Mounting index, 37, 38 MTP/PTP, 257, 352 [Multi selector], 332 [Multi selector center button], 331 [Multiple exposure], 206 Multiple exposure, 206 [My Menu], 376 [Add items], 376 [Rank items], 379 [Remove items], 378 N NEF, 66, 69 NEF (RAW), 66, 69 [NEF (RAW) recording], 69 [NEF (RAW) bit depth], 69 [12-bit], 69 [14-bit], 69 [Type], 69 [Compressed], 69 [Lossless compressed], 69 [Uncompressed], 69 Nikon Transfer, 256, 259 [No memory card?], 344 [Non-CPU lens data], 218 O Overview data, 239, 240 P PC, 222, 259 Photo info, 229 [Photo info/playback], 332 PictBridge, 263, 440 Picture angle, 60, 297, 386 Picture Controls, 162 Playback, 57, 225, 274 folder, 281 full-frame, 226 information, 229 menu, 278 slide show, 288 446 thumbnail, 241, 331 zoom, 243 [Playback folder], 281 [Print (DPOF)], 268 [Border], 270 [Page size], 270 [Start printing], 270 [Time stamp], 270 Print options (PictBridge [Setup] menu), 266 [Border], 266 [Cropping], 267 [No. of copies], 266 [Page size], 266 [Start printing], 267 [Time stamp], 266 [Print select], 268 [Border], 270 [Page size], 270 [Start printing], 270 [Time stamp], 270 [Print set (DPOF)], 272 Printing, 262 Programmed auto, 114 Protecting photographs, 244 R Rear-curtain sync, 194 [Red-eye correction], 367 Red-eye reduction, 194 Red-eye reduction with slow sync, 195 [Release button to use dial], 343 Release mode, 85 continuous, 86, 88 high speed, 86, 88 low speed, 86, 88 live view, 86, 90 mirror up, 86, 102 self-timer, 86, 100 single frame, 86 Remote cord, 392 Reset, 204, 293, 304, 422 [Reset custom settings], 304 [Reset shooting menu], 293 [Reverse indicators], 345 RGB color space, 184 RGB histogram, 232, 282 [Rotate tall], 287 S S (single-point AF), 76 S (single-servo AF), 74, 80 S (small), 70 [Save/load settings], 358 Saving camera settings, 358 [Self-timer delay], 319 Sensitivity, 103 [Set Picture Control], 164 [Monochrome], 164 [Filter effects], 167, 169 [Toning], 167, 169 [Neutral], 164 [Standard], 164 [Vivid], 164 Setup menu, 346 Shooting data, 234, 235, 236, 237 [Shooting info display], 324 Shooting menu, 290 [Shooting menu bank], 291 [Shooting speed], 321 Shutter speed, 116, 123 auto FP high-speed sync, 186, 194, 326 flash sync speed, 194, 326 lock, 123 Shutter-priority auto, 116 Shutter-release button, 3, 56 [Shutter-release button AE-L], 318 [Side-by-side comparison], 374 Single-point AF, 76 Size, 70 [Slide show], 288 [Frame interval], 288 Slide show, 288 [Slot 2], 72, 296 [Backup], 72 [Overflow], 72 [RAW Slot 1-JPEG Slot 2], 72 Slot selection, 156, 228, 279, 364 Slow sync, 194 Speedlight, 186 Spot, 110, 317 T Television, 274 Ten-pin remote terminal, 4, 221, 392 Thumbnail, 241, 331 TIFF (RGB), 66 Time, 40, 349 Time exposure, 392 Timer, 100, 211 [Trim], 368 Two-button reset, 204 U [USB], 257, 352 [Mass Storage], 257, 352 [MTP/PTP], 257, 352 USB, 256, 352 cable, i, 256 V [Vertical AF-ON button], 313 Vertical shutter-release button lock, 337 Video, 274, 348 [Video mode], 348 Viewfinder, xviii, 6, 7, 12, 47, 388, 389, 407 eyepiece, 47, 100, 213, 388, 389 focus, 47 ViewNX, 163, 350 [Vignette control], 299 [Virtual horizon], 360 Virtual horizon, 99, 335, 360 [Voice memo], 248, 351 Voice memo, 227, 246, 247–254 [Voice memo button], 249, 352 [Voice memo overwrite], 249, 352 W WB, 6, 146 [White balance], 140 [Auto], 140 447 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in brackets ([ ]). [Choose color temp.], 141 [Cloudy], 141 [Direct sunlight], 140 [Flash], 141 [Fluorescent], 140 [Incandescent], 140 [Preset manual], 141 [Shade], 141 White balance, 139 bracketing, 130, 135 preset manual, 141, 148 Wireless, 187, 261, 262, 356, 387 network, 261 transmitter, 261, 356 [Wireless transmitter], 356 [World time], 40, 349 [Date and time], 349 [Date format], 349 [Daylight saving time], 349 [Time zone], 349 WT-4, 261, 262, 356, 387 448 DIGITAL CAMERA User's Manual No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION. SB1F05(11) 6MB03911-05 En Printed in Japan En
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2 Modify Date : 2013:06:21 15:26:20+09:00 Create Date : 2008:10:30 11:43:59+09:00 Metadata Date : 2013:06:21 15:26:20+09:00 Document ID : uuid:f59c0cdd-7fa4-4ac4-a310-8c45d1a8711e Instance ID : uuid:538c3207-db04-4755-b5b9-ec630764562c Format : application/pdf Title : Creator : Nikon Corporation Page Count : 476 Page Layout : SinglePage Author : Nikon CorporationEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools